+ All Categories
Home > Documents > TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

Date post: 02-Oct-2021
Category:
Upload: others
View: 2 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
246
TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO TECHNIQUE B'l F. A. STEINHAUSEN: A TRANSLATION)AND STUDY Presented by Donald Vern Rupert To fulfill the thesis requirement for the degree of Doctor of Musical Arts Department of Performance and Pedagogy Thesis Director: Dr. Eugene Selhorst Eastman School of Music of the University of Rochester June, 1963
Transcript
Page 1: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO TECHNIQUE

B'l F. A. STEINHAUSEN: A TRANSLATION)AND STUDY

Presented by

Donald Vern Rupert

To fulfill the thesis requirement for the degree of

Doctor of Musical Arts

Department of Performance and Pedagogy

Thesis Director: Dr. Eugene Selhorst

Eastman School of Music

of the

University of Rochester

June, 1963

Page 2: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

\ 813()60

Page 3: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

PREFACE

The principal part of this thesis will consist of a trans­

lation from the German of ~ Physiologischen Fehler und die

Umgestaltung der Klaviertechnik by Dr. F. A. Steinhausen.

This work has not appeared in English, although its influence

has been widely felt in pedagogical circles. The edition

which will be used for the translation is that of 1913, pub­

.lished by Breitkopf und Haertel and containing commentary by

Dr. Ludwig Riemann. The Riemann commentary will be translated

only where its importance or pertinence seems necessary to

supplement or to clarify the original text.

The importance of the book is partly historical and partly

a consequence of the novel approach to the subject. The work

is historically important because it represents one of the

first clear breaks with the traditional technical schools •.

Th~ emphasis is on what has come to be called the "weight" or

"relaxation" school of piano playing, as developed subsequently

by Breithaupt and Matthay. The new approach toward the subject

stems undoubtedly from the profession of the writer: he was a

medical doctor. The scientific training in his profession

acco~~ts, perhaps, for a certain rationality and clearsighted­

ness--qua~ities which are often most regrettably lacking in

books in this field.

ii

Page 4: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

The schools of Breithaupt and ~fatthay owe much to the

groundwork done by Steinhausen. Breithaupt, perhaps the

best-known exponent of the weight school, gives credit to

Steinhausen for his discoveries and utilizes most of the

technical terminology developed by the latter.

The value of the Steinhausen book lies in its objective,

revolutionary approach which refutes, explains and compares

the new with the old--in contrast to Breithaupt, who, when

the spade-work was done, was free to apply this approach in

a practical way to specific pianistic problems. Steinhausen

is quite aware also of the musical side of the pianist's art,

and in trying to find the most effective means to the pian­

ist's end, merely attempts to free him from much of the error

of tenaciously held pedantic strictures in order to allow

more attention to be concentrated on the interpretive role.

Moreover, Steinhausen's book is written for pianists, in lan­

guage that can be understood by individuals not familiar with

anatomical terminology. Failure to limit the extent of such

terminology has made many later works of a similar nature

.incomprehensible to those for whom they were.intended.

Supplementing the translation itself, the author will

attempt to synthesize in a succeeding chapter the most im­

portant points developed by Dr. Steinhausen, discussing their

significance and, to some extent, evaluating them. Reference

will be made to several other works on piano technique chosen

iii

Page 5: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

especially for. comparison with Steinhausen's views. Stein­

hausen•s position in the history of the field will thus be

more clearly apparent and his pioneer work more readily

evident.

Titles appearing in footnotes in the translation have

been retained in German, there being in most cases no English

translation available. Steinhausen's ordering of them is

also retained. The section numbers appearing in the left­

hand margin are those in the original text. References

within the translation will be made using these numbers,

according to Steinhausen's practice. Certain details of

Steinhausen's punctuation, especially in rega~i to enumer­

ation, have also been retained in the interests of faithful­

ness of translation.

The author wishes to express special gratitude to

Dr. Eugene Selhorst for his careful reading of the text,

to Dr. Ernest Livingstone for his invaluable aid in the

translation, and to Mrs. Cecile Genhart without whose self­

less and inspiring teaching over a period of many years this

work would not have come into being.

iv

Page 6: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

PREFACE ••

CHAPTER I.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THE PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PI&~O.TECHNIQUE BY F. A. STEINHAUS&~: A . TRANSLATION • • • . • .. • • • • . • . • • • .

Section I. General Foreword . . . . . .

ii

1

2

Section II. False Conceptions about the Formation of Piano Tone • • . 17

Section III.

Section IV.

·Section V.

The Misunderstanding of Physio-logical Practice, the Founda-tion of Technique . . . . . . 39

The Erroneous Application Gymnastics of Muscles and

of

Joints in Piano Technique • . 64

The Misconception of Funda­mental Forces and Forms of Motion in Previous Technical Systems • • • • • • . • • • • 98

Section VI. The Basic Physiological Form for the Attacking Motion 131

CHAPTER II.

CHAPTER III.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

A SYNTHESIS AND AN EVALUATION . . . . . . SOME COMPARISONS WITH OTHER METHODS

. ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

• 166

. 192

• 239

v

Page 7: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

CHAPTER I

THE PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE .RESHAPING OF PIANO TECHNIQUE BY F. A. STEINHAUSEN:

A TRAJ.~SLATION

Page 8: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

SECTION I

GENERAL FOREWORD

1. In looking through the literature about piano tech­

nique, about the methods of attack and of practicing, about

the use of hands and fingers, one encounters a startling lack

of agreement between teaching and practice. Artists, espe­

cially the most important, play quite differently from what

the teaching methods declare to be correct. They employ,

contrary to all pedantic strictures, the full power and free­

dom of movement of the whole arm from the sr;Julder down.

The results achieved can not be obtained by traditional meth­

ods because without exception these methods limit themselves

in tone production more or less strictly to finger technique

and to an attack with isolated finger movement. They seek

to make the parts of the arm--and even more the shoulder-­

rigid. Clearly, the question of who is right, the artists or

the school tradition, must be answered completely in favor of

the former. The artists have advanced; the schools have

stood still.

In Kullak 1 s Aesthetics ~f the Piano he says, "Many

virtuosi play freely with the arm; this should on no account

be imitated by students."

2. Why does this paradox linger on so tenaciously? If the

artists are in possession of the correct technique, then it

2

Page 9: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

3

nust be that they a~e not equip?ed co tra~s=it it to the

younger ge~eraticn.

almost as many as thera are artists--a~d n8ne c~n be advanced

as generally va:id.

h '1 . ,_ • ... ' • t .e pup1~ co~t~nues ~o ue c~recteG

master also had to tread--the path of artistic i~tuition,

Hhich pays little heed to the natul.~e of technique • ri'l1e art-

. t d . , ' ~ ]-. . , b'l'' 1s ~ocs not ~now now ne pLays ~ecause cne a ~ 1ty to inves-

:'.s a :..~l.ll.'- ~1e lad::s the sense

that

ition. :-:i.s c:rt takes on a ce:.·tz.:.::-:.. :Zo::rt! for hio ir:. his bodily

motion~ basis he

This

... 't' d' ' b. . , 't -F " - t t: 1n~u1 1ve 1reccness ~r~nzs w1tn ~ _recucm o~ rnovesen --o£

technique--without ~.Verry c~bout its la;s. Nonetheless, it obeys

these lm\7s, unconscious oE their necessity. The active organ-

ism of the finished player is therefore the sou::ce fro-.n \vhich

1 ~ 4 • , .. b 1 ~ h . a :_ en11gnc...er ... mc:nt a· out L1e essc:r~ce o:c tec~.n~que must Coine.

Physiology makes the body tte object of its study. In

the analysis of artistic

the object of attention~

Page 10: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

4

finished execution and from this derive the underlying laws

of technique. For the artist unconscious!:Y. seelcs out the

best and most purposeful movements in order to express his

inner ideal. This naive directness needs no methodical in­

struction. It accomplishes what is right of itself. It

makes every movement with model correctness. In this in­

stance the body is actually the organ of the artistically

creative spirit. Any technique which attempts to dictate to

the body from any other source becomes unnatural and breaks

down. Thus we come to the only possible and logical point

of view: we can teach the body nothing; we can only learn

from it. If the artist cannot clearly differentiate between

his art and its means, then who but the physiologist can be

called upon to do it for him?

The motion in piano attack is a motion like anv other

and obeys the ~ laws. By applying the experience of

present-day physiological knowledge to discover the lmvs of

instrumental technique we shall certainly come closer to the

essence of technique and be able to distinguish true from

false, remove errors which have crept in, and achieve real

progress. The correct understanding of the essence of tech­

nique will lead necessarily to a healthy relationship between

technique and art.

3. In the last three decades several attempts have been made

to further piano technique with the help of physiology. As

late as the seventies in the preceding century such an attempt

Page 11: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

5

would have had slight chance of success. It was only later

that the mechanics of our organism were scientifically and

thoroughly worked out. Since then 0. Fischer1 and Braune,

Hering, du Bois Reymond2 and others have done the necessary

path-breaking work. Today this work is so far advanced that

the analysis of a synchronized, complicated motion has become

possible--that is, to an extent that it can help manual tech­

nique. Standing, walking, running, jumping and so forth have

been the subjects of precise physiological investigations.

Applied motions, however, have not as yet been studied. 3

Until now, only musicians--naturally of few physiologi­

cal pretensions--have interested themselves ir. the motions

involved in playing the piano. In my opinion the credit of

a first scientific attempt belongs to the American, F. Clark­

Steiniger, a pupil of Deppe.

Deppe and his pupils strove to produce a beautiful tone.

Significantly they found themselves up against physiological

questions continually. The natural movements of a gifted

player are the natural movements of the normal organism.

These movements not only point out the fundamental rules and

laws of technique but also satisfy the aesthetic demands, the

lThe founder of modern physiological mechanics. "Physiolog­ische M~chanik oder Bewegungslehre" in the Enzz~1.5eedie der math. ~~ssensch. IV. Bd., 8. Hef;. Leipzig 190 , Teubner •

. 2Who gives us the first compilation of.our present-day knowledge in this field in his Muskelphysiolo&ie oder Bewegungslehre (Berlin 1903). -----

3In 1911 Dr. Rit~chl's Die Anschlagsbeweg~nge~ beim Klavier­spiel appeared.

Page 12: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

6

claims of beauty and richness of sound. Other musicians

have made studies with physiological interest, but un­

fortunately with more or less insufficient understanding.

Some of these studies, several of which are older than

those of Deppe's school, should be mentioned: for example

those of Koehler, 4 Kullak, 5 Ehrlich, 6 h''erkenthin, 7 Knorr, 8

Germer,9 Stoewe,lO Klindworth,ll Jae11, 12 Bree, 13 Unschuld

von Melasfeld,l4 and others. Special mention is due

4Loui s Koehler, §yyte~'ltische h~l:lrr:!~th~de f'-!.~~ Kt~Y..ier~P!_e_h ~? tf'-!.~ik. Vol. I. pie J.vfe:__~ha:_ni~ ~ls G~!!dl_age cler Technil~. ~ra ed. by H. Riemann. Leipzig, lBffg, Breitkopf und Haertel.

5A. Kullak. Di~ J:._ehre yom ~schlag_ and .Qi~ P~2:-~_thetik_ des Klavierspiel~. (ed. Bischo!t. Leipzig, 188"6 ~91).

6Ehrlich. Wie uebt man Klavier. Berlin, 187(;.

7 \<Jerkenthin. Die Lehre vom Klavierspiel. Berlin, 1889. Vols. I and I I-.-werken.th:ln ·is cerfainly the most pedantic of those authors who regulate everything, even to the small­est detail. His system leaves the player no independence at all and inhibits every free impulse. From this vie"tvpoint the natural movements of beginners appear objectionable and are to be eradicated. 8Knorr. Method. Leitfaden fuer Klavierlehrer. 2nd ed. Leipzig, Breitkopf und Haerte~

9Germer. Lehrbuch der Tonbildung beim Klavierspiel. 4th ed. Leipzig, 1"8"90. · -- --·

lOstoewe. Die Klaviertechntk als physiologische-mechanische Bew~ungslenre. Berlin, 1~~.

llKlindworth. Elementar-Klavierschule. Mainz, 1902.

12M. Jaell. Der ~nschlag. A new course of piano study built.on physiological principles. Vol. I. Leipzig, Breitkopf und Haertel.

13Bree. Die Grundlage der Methode Leschet~. Mainz, Schott.

14unschuld von Melasfeld. Die Hand des Pianisten. Leipzig, 1901. Breitkopf und Haerter:- -. --- ---

Page 13: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

7

Breithauptl5 and Bandmann who have advanced farthest in the

physiological penetration of piano technique, although they

are quite different in approach. I will come back several

times to some of the authors mentioned.

4. The characteristic common to all except the tvJo last

mentioned authors is the inability to rid themselves of

finger technique, even though they have cast it out in

principle. There can no longer be any doubt that finger

technique is the basic error under which piano playing has

suffered until now. The most recent efforts demonstrate

this clearly and in full agreement 'tvith physiological

science. Although a large number of piano te<:,chers still

adhere to an isolated finger attack, the more perceptive

are endeavoring seriously to cultivate a more reasonable

form of attack.

Up to the present the success of this endeavor could

only be rather modest because of insufficient physiological

knowledge. The way back to nature out of the arid atmos­

phere of stiff and basically anti-musical school training

had only been partially discovered. True, the emphasis on

fingers had been relaxed to the point vJhere a hand, even a

limited forearm attack was allowed. The "free fall 11 not '

15The following writings by Rudolf Maria Breithaupt have ~ppeared: Die Natuerliche !fla_Y-~er~e.:_chnik •. Leipzig, 1912 • .)rd ed.; Die GrLindlagen der K!-_avie~t:_ecJ:mi~. Practical Edition. Leipzig, 1907 • .QJavi?;_~stika, ·an essay on modern piano technique in Die ~rusik, 1903, No. 22. uModern Pian­ists" in Die Musik, f9oz;-;-No. 8 and 11 Gloss_~ ~ur Gewichts­technik11 Rhein. Theater- u. Musikzeitung XI, 1910.

Page 14: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

8

only of the fingers but also of the hand and forearm, had

~-lready been introduced. The meaning of \veight in the move­

ment of mass was sensed, but nothing had been proposed which

involved more than the forearm. A characteristic statement

by 0. Bie (Das Klavier und seine Heister, Muenchen, 1898, . .

p. 20) reads, "Piano technique has proceeded slowly from

tapping fingertips to the present suppleness, which involves

the arm up to the elbow." Why not further? On what account

should the boundary of the "present suppleness" be drawn

precisely at L .. e elbow?

The fall of the finger or of the hand was grasped as

a physical occurrence, whereas it is really a physiological

occurrence and a swinging movement (64, 69). One can sur­

mise from many revealing examples how difficult it is for

musicians to find their way in the simplest things of natural

science. It is remarkable hm..r often one finds true and false

juxtaposed. Next to appropriate observations one finds the

most elementary lack of knowledge. A good example is the

confusion of swinging power and elasticity by one of the most

recent authors, Breithaupt. On p. 277 of "Claviristica" he

says, "Isn't rather swinging po't·J'er, elasticity, the source

of all technique." Page 278: "Technique is rather to be com­

prehended as a moment of elasticity, from the standpoint of

a healthy swinging power." Perhaps the' following place vJ'ill

resolve any doubt about his identifying the two forces

(p. 283): "The hand is thrown back freely. It falls of

Page 15: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

9

its mvn weight on the key and bounds back like a rubber ball.

The movement is analagous to the swinging motion used by chil­

dren when they bounce a rubber tire. 11 The following sentence

is to be found in one of the latest competent writings

(Zuschneid, Methodischer Leitfaden fuer de~ Klavierunter­

richt. Berlin-Lichterfelde, 1904, p. 3). It may well serve

as a model of lack of clarity. "Mechanical practice reaches

its peak in the complete detachment of the arm and all

participating li:nbs from the playing mechanism."

5. In my opinion help can only come from the physiologist.

It is impossible to clarify this confusion of opinions vJith­

out technical knowledge of physiology. One ccnnot reasonably

expect the physiologist to be more than a mus~cal dilettante;

one can not be a specialist in both fields. Musicians have

displayed great zeal in attempting to achieve their goal--

but in vain. In vie\v of this the wish to help and to steer

all the otherwise futile \vork into the right channel is vigor­

ously stimulated. The path is unmistakably indicated, and

the present work will try to point it out step by step.

6. The physical power and tonal fullness of the attack have

not kept pace with the high perfection of piano manufacture

(14). Until now the school method has not been able to rid

itself of a tradition originating with the predecessors of

the piano, the spinet and the clavichord (see Section II).

In addition, technique suffers even today from the continuing

influence of gymnastics which is based one-sidedly on the

Page 16: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

10

motive apparatus (see Sections III and IV). Both influences,

the one from the instrument and the one from gy@Lastics,

point to the same conclusion: replacement of the inadequate

and even harmful finger technique by a more powerful form of

movement, better suited to the construction of the instrument

and of our bodies.

The player should command all of the tonal resources

of the instrument--this demand is often heard. The issue

would not be so frequently raised if finger technique really

produced tone corresponding to the perfection of the instru­

ment and if it made legato playing--the proper task of piano

technique--possible. For the quality of sound, singing tone,

volume and carrying power are dependent upon a certain

strength of the individual tones--subject, of course, to

the inherent tonal characteristics of the instrument and its

sustaining power. It will be demonstrated that finger tech­

nique does not provide the necessary power and that the

binding of tones to one another is thereby made difficulc.

If sustained tone, on which a sonorous legato depends, re­

quires relatively great force, then the degree of strength

and legato belong together, physically as well as musically.

This is the "tvhole secret of a correct attack.

7. One cannot improve technique until he is clear about

its essence. Technique--as the sum of all of the varied, co­

ordinated motions in the attack--must be observed from the

same standpoint as all other co-ordinated motions. Although

Page 17: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

ll

technique can and should be only a means towards musical per­

formance, it does take on a certain independence \·lhen one

begins to pay special attention to the natural mechanical and

psycho-physical laws governing it. All artistic activity must

yi ·' __ d to these natural laws. If one neglects them, he may

fall into error or expend needless effort. As long as one

sees the technique of attack in finger motion alone and per­

mits at most only a limited participation of the hand and

forearm, he opposes these laws shortsightedly and arbitrarily.

It is not surprising if progress then ceases and stagnates.

8. Technique means unlimited obedience, strict dependence

of the executing organs on the will and artistic intention.

Movement and will appear as one in a perfected technique. To

reach this ultimate goal the individual movements must be

drilled and frequently repeated. Technique without practice

is unthinkable. Technique might be defined as the working

out of the unity of will and action, or the adaptation of the

actions most suited to the instrument for the artistic purpose.

If one wants to understand the real meaning of technique, he

must know the essence of physiological exercise. Until nmv,

the necessary background material for such an understanding

was not available. In 1881 I had the privilege of hearing E.

du Bois Reymond give his famous speech about practice. The

occasion was the celebration of the endowment of the Berlin

Academy for Hilitary Medicine, whc:_·e I was a student. This

speech is unfortunateiy much too littie known in musicians'

Page 18: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

circles. One finds individual phrases from the speech cited

frequently, but understanding of the essence of practice

(see Section III) is almost nonexistent. The fourth and

fifth sections will be devoted to clearing up errors grmving

out of a misunderstanding of exercise as a psycho-physical

occurrence. All of the errors attempt to replace intcllec-

tually governed movements by witless gymnastics of the muscles

and joints and to draw practicing down to a purely mechanical

proceeding. This detaches technique from art and makes it an

end in itself. Obviously one completely loses sight of the

real goal of all art.

9. Technique and practice are so closely related that an

error in one necessarily affects the other. To understand

the essence of technique every pianist must make a basic

knowledge of physiology and psychology a part of his fund

of general information. The idea that muscles and joints

must be observed in their workings from the standpoint of

mechanics needs to become more prevalent among pianists and

pedagogues. This recognition has doubtlessly begun, and the

present work will go on from there. The attainment of certain

physiological knowledge and of fundamental physiological con­

ceptions has become indispensable for the musician, since we

now have a physiology of exercise and a science of the mechan­

ics of muscles and joints. This knowledge has become indis­

pensable because the organs of mo~-lon and their orderly ar-

rangement are his tools for bringing sound alive. He ~·;ho does

Page 19: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

13

not knmv his tools cal}_ not._ .E..Q_§~i bl v ~1ak~ E.£?P2~ use of them

and still less offer instruction in thei~ ~· In this no

more is demanded of the musician than has always been neces­

sary for painters and sculptors. The pictorial artist needs

anatomical knowledge because he must know the form of the body

to be pictured; the musician needs physiological knowledge

because he must know the movement of his own body.

If the player would know the construction and function

of his arm exactly, then let him be guided in his search by

the physiologist. Let him accept instruction from the phys­

iologist, recognizing the undeniable fact that the musician

is certainly a layman and remains at best a dilettante in

these matters. Specifically in the present work, which at­

tempts to assist the pianist, precise evaluation instead of

premature negative judgment should prevail. No one will be

more grateful than the author for well-founded arguments and

pertinent objections. Unfortunately one cannot expect that

all of the arguments t~ll be factual. Instead, preconceived

opinions and the stubborn complacency of school tradition

will-for a large number of professional musicians--hinder

the quiet consideration which leaves room for doubt--the kind

of consideration which asks if the "new" might really be

right and does not see the mere idle observations of a pale

theoretician. Granted, this requires an intellectual flex­

ibility which does not refuse te~aciously to put itself into

a world of foreign ideas.

Page 20: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

14

10. The study of mechanics and the movement of joints is

chiefly methodical learning by seeing, the open-eyed observa­

tion of every, even the smallest, movement of the arm in­

volved. This should be done with oneself and with others

and, if possible, t-1ith the arm bare. The study from one

joint to the next provides the only real understanding of

the inner connection of the movements of the joints with one

another. No writer can relieve us of this work; one has to

wrestle with it himself.

One might protest that most of the following material

has already been covered by others on various occasions and

even by musicians in their theoretical wor:<s. However, it

only seems so. On closer observation the great difference

between occasionally appropriate statements and a systematic,

physiological re-working of the entire material becomes ap­

parent. t~ile something good and correct has been said here

and there, until now there has been nothing on several points:

. 2rr the very necessary condemnation of gymnastics,

on the understanding of the ~Y£hic nature of true

technique,

on the understanding of t~~ fundamental physiological

pccurren~ ~n piano playing--forea~ rotatio~ and

the ~~vingi11_g r.:1ovement.

The conscious use of these two elements rrorearm rota­

tion and swinging movemen!7; the realization that artists

have always and will alw~ys apply ther.:1 in practice, even if

Page 21: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

15

unconsciously; the necessary consequences arising from this

recognition--all this must lead back to and into the natural,

so that one ~oves his hands in piano playing in a manner as

simple, straightforward and natural as in all other more or

less artistic occupations (26, 38). Then we shall learn only

that which is natural to the body and thus appropriate to the

original unity of art and technique. In this way we shall

succeed in preventing many beginners from ruining their

health and irritating nerves and muscles as a result of in-

correct practice habits.

11. The present work ought then to arouse protest, ought to

awaken the piano-playing world to serious criticism and ne'ii7

efforts. w~ere there is no criticism, there is necessarily

intellectual stagnation. The present work takes two lines

of approach simultaneously.

The one line attacks the still widespread errors of fin­

ger technique with all their regrettable consequences, the many

contradictions between artistic playing and school methods,

and the outdated, old-fashioned but still reigning technique.

The other line addresses itself toward the relatively

progressive works. Their authors are hailed partly as com­

rades in the struggle against the outmoded technique. vfuile

recognizing their good and rewarding efforts, we must, hm·Jever,

also oppose them. They must be content to accept whatever tech­

nical instruction and pertinent criticism is appropriate. 16

16The meaning of this passage is not entirely clear. In Ger­man: "Das andre Gesicht ist den nc;uer" 'u2:ceits verhaeltnisr,1aes-

Page 22: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

16

12. All criticism should have a ncH and better end in vietv.

Therefore, in the final section, the author proposes certain

fundamental -~onns of .9:. 2:-~siolq_gi~~l movem~nt;. o~. _?.t~~~l~.

One should not expect a new method. I -v1ish expressly to keep

away from that. Only the joint efforts of the musician and

physiologist will create a ne-v1 method. Before this common

work can get under way the musical specialist must have first

tried out the new concepts. This is an indispensable condi­

tion, and any discussion tvrithout first meeting it is out of

the question. First, it should be stressed continually that

the "new" is not netv at all. ~-Je have it already. It is only

a question of separating true from false. The t..rorking out of

a method is something for the music specialist and the piano

pedagogue. Indeed, the working out of an appropriate school

method is not even to be thought of at first--that is, before

the whole extensive ~e2a~atory work is done by musical spe­

cialists. They must re-adjust themselves intellectually to

the unaccustomed demands, find their way within a new set of

ideas, and put the theoretically new into a practical, use­

ful form. Only fundamental c9n~~~~rati~~~ can be set forth

here. The ways by means of which error may be avoided and

the return to the natural achieved can only be suggested.

-------------·---· -----------------·----

Page 23: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

SZCTION II

FALSS CO~CZPTIONS ABOUT THE FOX~~TION OF PIANO TONS

13. Before we embark on a discussion of the physiological

errors, He must first correct several -.;vide spread vic\vS about

the nature of the piano. The physiological-technical errr~s

a~1d the physical-acoustical er::c. .... ,~ .. ,_;:;: :,-:est closely related

and dependent upon each other. One miRht supoose that the .._;; ...

piano, as a mechanical and basically simple instrument, ~·J'Ould

certainly not be misunderstood. This is, hmvever, the case.

Needless to say, the piano remains v;hat it is however many

fantastic notions about the production of tone may exist in

the minds of the players. TI1e consequences of these notions

are noticed, hov1ever, in the instruction about attack and tone

production as well as in the physiological conception of tech-

nique. These consequc~ces must be recognized so that they can

be dispelled.

All of our musical instruments, in their form and construc­

tion, are adapted most precisely to our organs of motion. An

organic natural law lies at the root of the gradual development

of the instruments, from imperfect beginnings to fo~1s satis­

fying the most exacting aural demands. As yet there has been

no survey of this development in the history of keyboard instru-

ments from the physiological point of view--beginning with the

17

Page 24: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

18

beating of the organ ~,rith fists and elbmvs in the thirteenth

centurJ to the refined technique of the present-day grand

piano. Piano manufac~urers have wor~ed tirelessly on the

further devclop:nent of the piano unt:.:;_ most r:2cent tir.1cs.

By using strings of ever greater strength, they vJere obliged·

to reinforce the sounding board correspondingly. The limita­

tions of our muscular power stood as a counterbalance to their

~~~arts. This made an easy key action a natural cond:::~n

for the practical use of the instrument. As mentioned before,

the highly developed art of piano construction, assisted by

modern machinery, has generally been ~.Jell to the fore. Only

a fevl artists have forccd piano construction to still more

brilliant achieve2cnts. As an example, the development of

the piano o-v;cs its last and highest staze to the truly great

virtuoso, Liszt. It appears that we have now arrived at the

limit of \vhat it is possible to achieve. Reinforcement of

materials can no longer be combined with greater playing ease.

14. In any case the development of the modern pianoforte from

the clavichord and spinet demands a quite substantially greater

expenditure of energy for the attack. Daintiness with nealiryi-o 0

ble po\ver was the characteristic of performance on the fore~

runners of present-day instruments. No great outlay of muscu­

lar strength was required. The attack could be accomplished

without the slightest exertion by the pressure of the fingers

gliding over the keys and resting on them without even being

Page 25: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

19

raised.l Even the German or Viennese mechanism demanded only

slight effort from the finger muscles, since the hammers tvere

still set in motion by a simple mechanism. The tvay of playing

tvas changed and greater energy der::anded only by the general

introduction of the repetition mechanism tvhich allmvcd the

hammer to assume the striking position tvithout a release of

the key. However, schools and tradition anxiously held fast

:_, :::1e former method of attack. And so it is tod.:y. ~·Jhat

was once a natural result of mechanical conditions--namely

the rather slight movements, light application of finger

strength, and a barely perceptible hand motion--became now

a binding rule, an enforced torture which excluded all natural-

ness. t·1odern pianists sensed that piano technique now required

a completely different physiological fo~1dation. They adapted

themselves unconsciously to the grotnng demands of piano con-

struction and began to utilize a netv technique free of pedantry.

As a matter of course, tone power and beauty of performance

pointed out the way.

Finger strength could no longer accomplish the task. A

new E1-_acement of the source of po'iver became inevitable. At

first it tvas moved anxiously and cautiously to the hand and

lrt is we:C.l known that J. S. Bach was the first to introduce the normal use of the thumb and little finoer into piano tech­nique. Instead of the previous practice of placing the fin~ers outstretched, the hand position had to be altered to allot-1 curved fingers as a consequence of the relation of the thumb to the other fingers.

Page 26: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

20

forearm and, unconsciously, certainly still higher to the

upper arm and shoulder. Indeed, \vhen an artist tries to draw

out all the tonal richness which lies in today's perfected

instruments, he uses the great ffi'.lscular force of the shoulder,

unknowingly and entirely as a matter of course. Cowmon sense

tells him that the relatively weak finger muscles and their

small, angular, paltry motions are insufficient for a power­

iul attack. The fact t~~t this new placement of power is in­

evitable must be grasped consciously by every pianist and be­

come his intellectual property.

15. The resul~ of historical observation must coincide v:ith

the resu}.t Q.I l?_hysiolo2ical observation, for the body and its

parts are the common origins of the instrumental mechanism

and the playing technique. Unfortunately the piano playing

world has mistaken and misunderstood the acoustical and physi-

- cal foundation of technique. Physical cause and psychic effect

have been confused, similar to the confusion in the field of

physiology. One might suppose the notion that piano tone could

be influenced after the occurrence of the attack would have

. been recognized as erroneous long ago and have been abandoned.

Such is not, however, the case. The fundamental error still

prevails today that one can produce different tone colors from

the piano strings by varying the method of attack. It is ap­

parent that such an idea would influence the cultivation of

the attack. There has arisen a collection of the most curious

ideas about tone production on the piano (23).

Page 27: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

21

15. The vibration of the elastically strung piano string is

activated by the elastic impact of the padded hammer. Every

part of the key mechanism is made of elastic material. The

elasticity of each part, as well as its size, weight, and the

best tvay of padding the hammer, have become fairly uniform

throughout the piano indus try, small differences betvJeen the

products of various factories or even instruments made by the

~~me factory notwithstanding. Piano manufacturers ~~ve been

guided quite reliably by t,,.;;i.~.,· finely cultivated ears--as the

scientific investigations of Helmholtz have since confirmed (17).

The most fantastic notions about the effect of the elastic

powers within the key mechanism reign in the world of musicians.

Obviously the conception of "elastic attack" (60) is construed

from a lack of clarity about the way in 'tvhich these elastic

powers act. No matter how many pianists one questions, none

can speak of this conception with any precision. The count­

less elastic powers in the piano are used only for the elastic

impact against the string, for its vibration and the vibration

of the resonating board--that is, for the acoustical task.

Elasticity which works in a mechanical way can not be ascer­

tained from without. Some (Breithaupt and Germer, for example)

imagine an elastic effect of the key mechanism on the attacking

finger, as if a ricocheting force ran back to the key from

the striking hammer and lifted the hand from the keys. This

idea has no foundation in fact. The springing back of the

key after the release of pressure is so minimal that it cannot

Page 28: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

22

be ac~mm.,rled:;ed as an aid to the motion of c.ttack. As proof

of this, a light object (a match, for instance) might be placed

on the de pres sed key. It will not be throvm U? at all or only

very slightly by the uptvard return o: the kev to =h:::: oosition ., .;.

turn of the key vJOuld be a definite error fror:t the s tancpoint

of piano construction. One cannot speak then of a rebound

-.:: the hand. It will be shown else~vhere (62) that the fir'"'er-

tips do not have this elasticit; either, that one cannot speak

about the elastic contact of fingers on the keys, and that

the elasticity of ~uscles, tendons, joints, etc. is used for

the in~er physiological function of the a~n motion itself.

17. h7e k.noH that the hammer mechanism is so constructed that

the hammer always strUces the string at exactly the same point.

The so-called English mechanism owes its victory over the older

German to its greater precision in regard to the point of at-

tack. Thus any alteration of tone color on the piano by chang­

ing the point of attack is ruled out, in contrast to the other

string instruments. Helmholtz points out that the ear of the

piano manufacturer picked out the best from the great number

of possible striking points producing the most varied tone

colors--so precisely that the most exact calculation could

not have done it better. In addition the weight of every in­

dividual part of the key mechanism, especially the hammer,

is constant and unalterable. Consequently the same moving

mass always strikes the string. A Hell-known law of mechanics

Page 29: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

23

states that work output equals the product of the mass and

th .... velocity of the movement. It follmvs that velocity is

the only remaining factor which can alter the strength of the

blow of the hammer on the string. The task of the I(ey-lever

mechanism is to.propel the hammer mass asainst the string.

Thus the vital power which sets the key in motion determines

the velocity of the hammer and thereby the loudness of sound.

According to Helmholtz the tone color is given to~· .. ~tring

once and for all by the form and elasticity of the mechanism

and the unchanging point of attack. One can not insist upon

this fact strongly enou3h. With this realization all foolish

ideas of influencing the tone-color or piano sound--of tone

formation--fall apart of their own accord. One can scarcely

imagine how many illusions have been indulged in this con-

nection (23).

18. The stroke of the hammer against the string is limited

to a single moment. Once accomplished, further influence on

the string is at an end. One must be clear on this point.

Although the fact in itself is well known, pianists respect

it very little. The consequences arising from·this situation

are correspondingly distorted. Do we still imagine that the

"tone formation" can be influenced after the moment of attack

by prolonged key pressure, as is reported of l•'lendelssohn? 2

2schneider (0usi~, ~l~vier und ~~~vie~3piel: Leipzig, 1884, p. 3) says that Mendelssohn 1 s ability to modify the tone after the attack by a push or pressure of the finger enchanted his admirers: a prime example of the best sort of auto- and mass­suggestion. Schneider is himself of the opinion that a great deal of fantasy was evident in Mendelssohn's case.

Page 30: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

24

If I should allow the key to remain depressed after the moment

of the hammer attack, nothing further will occur nor can occur

except that the string'~ vibration will continue unimpeded

until it becomes inaudible. There is no otl~ .. :::: in.Zl.uence on

piano tone than the mom en ta~y blotv .-:gc::ins t tl-.e string. It

is the most conspicuous short-coming of the piano as a musical

instrument. Christiani3 stresses the fixed nature of piano

.:0~-:e. 11 The pianist cannoi: :'lter a tone once struck. ·--~~-

that mo22nt he can never enter the lists with other musicians

as regards expression.'' The expressive means offered to the

pianist are only accent, rhythm and varying dynamic degrees

of attack. Although the advantages and deficiencies of the

piano as a musical instr~ment are found variously juxtaposed

in the literature, any mention of the most conspicuous defi-

ciency is almost always missing--that is, the impossibility

of influencing tone color by the manner of attack. At the

same time the limited duration of the tone as well as the im-

possibility of increasing or diminishing it are properly men­

tioned. Hennig finds the piano deficient only in its lack

of ability to crescendo~ In several places Schneider warns

against illusions as to the piano's weaknesses, the most con­

spicuous of which he sees correctly as the 11 glaring lack of

3christiani, pa~ Verstaendnis ~~ Klavier~el, Leipzig; Breit­kopf und Haertel, 1880; p. 14. 4Hennig, El:_!!_fuehrung in den Beruf des Klavierlehrers. 1903, p. 182.

Leipzirr 0,

Page 31: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

25

the possibility of modulation" of single tones. "The tone

is struck and then reverberates, becoming weaker every second

and soon disappearing entirely. The pianist cannot do the

slightest thing to prevent this natural phenomenon; he must

be content with it. ~ot the individual tone, but the perform-

ance as a whole is modified by the attack." ~.Jh.at musician

of today tells himself that?

The prolongation of the once excited vibration ~un still

be musically utilized to a certain extent to achieve the good

connection of tones--the legato (6, 22). The highest art of

piano performance is properly viewed as the greatest possible

cultivation of legato and the correct use of the pedal.

19. From what has been said above we can conclude that the

only influence on the tone which we possess consists exclu-

sively of the possibility of giving it varying intensity.

''Pianoforte" is therefore the most appropriate designation

for the instrument. The intensity of the sound corresponds

directly to the strength of the blow on the string, to the

energy of the key-attack, or to the vital power which comes

into contact with the key. ~.Jith this all possibilities of

influencing the tone are exhausted. Alteration of tone color

in the strict sense is not accomplished by alteration of the

intensity of sound. One may concede, however, that every de­

gree of intensity produces its own very limited tonal shading

which can be used in the musical performance. In this we can

Page 32: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

26

easily fall into the danger of succumbing to gross illusions

about the variability of tone color--as experience has taught

us. One thing is certain: that a singing piano tone is a rc-

sult of a certain minimum degree o:Z ton-2."!.. lo,-:dncss. The di-

ameter of the string, which has about reach2d its limit, and

the strength of the sounding board--i.e., the present-day

material constituents--demand a relatively great strength of

: ':~ack. Although good instru::.ents speak easily wit!-1 , 't·Jeak

attack, the tone has something damped, thin ar.d non-singing

about it--an effect that may be musically desirable at times.

However, the manifold gradations of intensity are sufficient

to provide an inexhaustible resource for music making, in spite

of the imperfections of the piano.

20. Up to now it has been the general error that no one has

insisted on a clear distinction between physical and psycho-

musical elements in piano tone formation. As long as this

point is not clear, any exolanation is i~ossible, any dis­

~~ion ~ele~. At the piano the relationship of the player

to tone formation is quite different from this relationship

on a string or wind instrument or in singing. The attempt

to separate the purely physical tone production from the musi­

cal expression (even from the simplest psychic element) on

a string or wind instrument would be in vain. One would have '

to move the bow in a machine-like manner or blow a wind instru-

ment in the manner of an organ with its wind apparatus. In

Page 33: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

27

this regard it stands on the lmves t plane of instruments.

In order to isolate the purely physical element at th2

piano, we must limit outselves to constant tone intensity on

a single key. In so doing the physical element in the attack

can actually be exposed. 5

21. The fundamental question to be answered can be rather

simply formulated as follows: Can the tone be varied and made

to sound different when the strength of attack 0:-1 :.:::..:.:. :::-:;me

key remains constant, by modifying the form of attack (i.e.,

through strength of finger contraction or through the fall

of hand or arm weight onto the finger--through player A or

artist B)? The majority of pianists believe this to be true.

One has only to inquire and he will hear the question answered

affirmatively every time--after an initial hesitation. This

prejudice rests unshakably secure and deep, although it is

only mass suggestion. Actually the question can only be an­

swered negatively owing to the whole construction and the

properties of the piano. We must admit that there can be no

talk of a healthy relationship between art and the exercise

of art at the piano until fearless criticism sweeps out the

piled-up debris of self-deception with an iron broom.

5In order to prevent a misunderstanding, let it be emphasized that the purely physical attack (in contrast to what is used in performance) sheuld be clearly distinguished from the physi­ological "movement of attack." The purely physical-mechanical attack is in itself only a part of the movement of attack. 1be movement of attack, on the other hand, is a psycho-physical proceeding which includes the element of performance.

Page 34: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

28

How can this widespread illusion be explained? Only by

the failure to separate the physical element, the attack, from

the musical, the performance, and consequently confusing the

physical 'tvith the aesthetic concepts in w:-..ich a::tists have

always been steeped. Unfortunately, even those among musicians

who have been concerned with physiological questions--most

notably Deppe--have not kept these concepts sufficiently sep­

arated. It would certainly mak2 an amusing collection, if

one wanted to take the time to gather together from the litera­

ture all the countless expressions and effusions about the in­

fluence of the attack on tone. T.-Je will mention here only a

few of the more recent authors. Deppe (according to Klose):

we must go back to the production of a single tone. The tone-­

which is produced, as he directs, by the unconscious free fall-­

is not only more noble, but also fuller, and has more carrying

power than that produced by hitting. Furthermore, this uncon­

scious, this spiritual quality can be perceived aurally, while

the ordinary attack, in its sober reality, lacks this genuinely

pleasurable sound--an artistic delight in its own right. He

explains this by saying that the hammer in the "fall" contacts

the string softly yet energetically, 'tvhile in hitting, the

string is struck roughly. A footnote says naively (p. 5):

"a scientific explanation of the effect of the free fall would

certainly be easy for the physicist." Deppe attributes quite

remarkable characteristics to the fingertips--an indication

Page 35: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

29

of his uncritical view of tone formation, arising from thor-

oughly subjective self-deception •. 1nrough the free fall using

weight, the tone is supposed to receive very special charac­

teristics of tone color (see 5 above{si£7). The fingers seem

to draw the tone out, the player appears to magnetize the

strings, etc. Soechting, too, thinks he finds the basis for

beautiful and ugly tone, mellow and harsh attack, in the r.,.:;ay

the hands and fingers are moved toward the keys.

Deppe's precedent. A simple pressing down of the l<eys is very

different from artistically formed tone. Tne ordinary attack

is a demonstration of power; artistic tone formation is exactly

the opposite--an exercise of will, a quiet pose of the hand

and arm at the moment of tone formation: the origins of the

free fall. Herkenthin (2£. ~it., p. 66) even grants various

touches such as legato, staccato, etc. the property of giving

the tone various colors. Similarly Breithaupt, when he speaks

of a way of attack which makes the tone grainy, or metallically

bright and hard. He says elsewhere: playing with the finger­

tips is cold, pointed and dry; playing with the finger cushions,

warm and mellow, round and sonorous.

22. T.Je defined the purely physical attack above. The physical

attack was isolated and made distinct from the conception of

performance. The element of performance at the piano can only

be excluded when one is concerned with a single tone, without

any reference to other tones. (We do not need to be concerned

Page 36: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

30

here with the intentional, purely physical sounding of several

tones simultaneously or consecutively.) Only when there is

a succession or simultaneous,sounding of tones can there be

differences of intensity, aspiring more or less toward an ex­

pression which reproduces a spiritual impulse. A musical per­

son i~~ediately relates two tones to each other, and this re­

lation is the beginning of a performance, the first germ of

a musical thought. Indeed, the relation of two tones can be

extremely varied and becomes infinitely complex when the

duration--this means only after-vibration6 on the piano--the

countless shades of intensity, repetition, and retrogression

are also considered.

The continuing vibration of the string is too often con-\

fused with prolongation of tone. Only a comparison with string

and wind instruments can prevent this confusion. Any attempt

to manipulate the key after (as well as before) the moment

of the hammer stroke is a vain and senseless undertaking.

The many ways of gliding and wiping, inner pressure and tender

stroking of the key which have been thought up in the course

of time--all of these manipulations have worth only in so far

as they regulate the strength of attack in some special way

or keep the fingers on the key. Kalkbrenner and de Kontski,

for example, are especially given to caressing or stroking

6steinhausen uses the word Nachdoner, that is, the natural period of vibration after the attack until the tone is no longer audible. The translator.

Page 37: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

31

the keys by drawing the fingertips inward. This is, according

to 0. Bie (QQ. cit., p. 235), a sensuous, charming method of

attack--in truth, like Logier's specialty of holding the fingers

in continual contact with the keys, a pleasant self-deception,

doubtless left over from clavichord mannerisms. According

to Caland, Deppe also directed that the keys be "fondled."

Although stroking and wiping may make good s~nse on the clavi­

chord, their application to the pianoforte is worthless.

There are no other purely mechanical foundations than

those mentioned above. One should ·bear in mind that allowing /

the key to remain depressed is only an external means to pre-

vent damping of the string. To await the right moment for

the application of the dampers, that is of the release of the

dampers, is the chief task of good, equalized legato playing

and is properly a psychic and not a mechanical thing. Choice

of the strength and the duration of single tones is, therefore, . the only means· which the piano puts at the disposal of the

player for musical expression.

23. Since the physical element of attack was not clearly and

definitely separated from the musical element of performance,

there arose inevitably a fundamental confusion of te~s. Tone,

tone formation and attack have been indiscriminately confused

in discussion, as if they all meant approximately the same

thing. In the figurative sense used here, tone means something

quite other than it does in acoustics. The language of music

Page 38: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

32

understands by the term a specific quality for an artist, for

an approach in teaching, for an artistic conception--in any

case, an intellectual product, even a creative element. This

creative element is expressed even TDore in the term, "tone

formation. 11 The artist forms, it is said, tl1c tone offcr~d

by the instrument according to his artistic intention and in­

clination. He can put his soul into even a single tone. Even

a single tone radiates this incorporated spiritunl •·· ~~lity,

affects one as noble, warm, intimate or whatever the other

expressions are. That is all good and unassailable when it

concerns an instrument which, according to its whole physical

construction, allows the artist to form the sound individually.

Such is the case with string instruments where the bowing point,

length of the tone, increase and decrease of intensity and

change of the moving mass exciting the string serve as means

for spiritual expression. And if one makes a comparative ob­

servation about the means offered to the pianist? The hammer

alone excites the vibration of the string, forced by the mech­

anism to strike the string always at the same point and with ,

the same moving mass. This excitement is always limited to

the moment of striking. The unchangeable length of the strings

excludes fine alterations of pitch. In short, a mechanism

and nothing but a mechanism which, cold and dead, always re­

sponds to equally strong excitement with exactly the same sound,

no matter what the form and manner of the power which contacts

Page 39: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

33

the keys may be (assuming equal intensity).

Since the situation regarding "tone formation" with a

single key was never accurately summarized, the aural effect

of an artist's performance, while accurately heard, was in­

correctly interpreted as being due to his "tone" or his attack.

It is wrong to speak of a soulful, temperamental, spirited

attack. This lack of clarity has led' in the end to the singu­

lar delusion that tone formation lies in the manner of : ':tack.

The full, round, warm, carrying, mellow, large tone, etc., is

supposedly produced only by the proper method--differently

presented by everyone, of cours~. Fortunately, however, the

piano manufacturer delivers all these qualities ready-made.

He manages to create them for us with the most refined and

perfect manufacturing techniques in an abundance which was

hardly suspected. What a self-deception it is for a pianist

to talk of dry, brittle, cold, colorful, blossoming or poetic

"tone formation"--qualities which all stem, without doubt,

either from the instrument or from the spiritual side of the

art of performance, but which have no meaning in reference

to formation and cultivation of "tone" on this most mechanical

of all instruments. The term, "tone," is generally misunder­

stood because of a transference of the characteristics of the

performance or of the instrument to a single tone. It is worth

mentioning that there is no chapter about "tone formation" on

the piano to be found in H. Riemann.7 Elsewhere one can see

7Theoretisch prakt. Klavierschule, 3rd edition, Leipzig, 1901.

Page 40: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

34

most any of the usual remarks about the misunderstood term,

tone formation, in any of countless catechisms, instruction

manuals, etc. According to my experience, piano manufacturers-­

who, as technicians, ought to be better informed than others-­

are unclear over the question whether method of attack has

any influence on tone produced on one and the same key. This

is because even they do not differentiate between physical

attack and musical performance. If the string could be acti-

vated in different ways by the attack, ~he hammer-key mechanism

would have to be capable of being put in motion in various

ways. It would have to respond, on its part, to the variety

of key attacks, if it were to pass them on. If one questions

a piano manufacturer about this, he will spring energetically

to his own defense and point to the absolute regularity of .·

the mechanism. Only intensity (or velocity) remains, then,

of all the supposed differences. The representatives of the

idea of piano "tone formation" usually refer to a well-known

place in Helmholtz which they thoroughly misunderstand. This

passage is wrongly construed to mean that the player can de-

termine tone color through the attack. The passage reads:

"No-other instrument has such a broad variability of tone color

available as the piano; on no other can the musical ear, there­

fore, select so freely the sound which corresponds to its re­

quirements."8 Helmholtz did not conceive of anything else

8The Riemann edition says here, "the sound shadings of the bass, middle and high registers are meant." (The translator)

Page 41: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

35

and certainly did not propose the whole question of whether

the player can affect piano tone formation.

It is not difficult to imagine how hard it is for the

musician--for whom the present thoughts about attack, tone

color and tone formation are new and unfamiliar--to orient

himself. The heaps of conflicting notions--acquired by train­

ing and all sorts of artistic influences, most of all by the

~~critical acceptance of these influences and through uncer­

tainty in physical and acoustical matters--burdens him like

a heavy lead weight. ~fuenever the musician makes a good start

towards getting used to these ideas, doubt and hesitation enter

again through the back door. The all too ingrained subjective

feeling that one can exercise an influence on the individual

tone in spite of everything--science simply has not yet dis­

covered the reason--negates all progress once more. Some of

this may be due to the nature and special constitution of the

artist. A part of it, however, is certainly acquired through

training for which the following admonition is intended. Every­

thing should be worked out on its own with sharp and critical

observation. At the same time, the artist clearly needs guid­

ance in the precise discipline of the natural sciences.

24. What the consequences of fostering these sorts of sugges­

tions and ideas are, what kinds of ridiculous qualities are

heard in the "tone," one can learn best from music reviev1s

and concert critiques in the daily press. How far these il­

lusions go can be inferred from the teaching of tone formation

Page 42: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

36

as upheld by Germer, which can serve as a typical example of

the views widespread in the music world. Germer stands rather

high, perhaps, as a practical pedagogue, but not as a scien­

tific one. His proposals would not draw special attention

if his ~ay of speaking of tone formation and of tone excita­

tion through the activity of the nervous system and the brain

were not so typical of the views of contemporary professional

musicians in general. Germer believes quite seriously that

the awakening of harmonic overtones, and therefore the specific

tone color, is dependent to a large extent upon continued key

pressure. The hammer comes into contac4 with the string in

a different way when the pressure principle is applied than

when the normal attack is· used. Earlier he speaks of learning

to produce a "longer tone. 11 An instructor who knows the in­

strument as does Germer has no business speaking of the pro­

duction of a longer piano tone. His characteristic argument

comes to a climax in the sentence, "the brain is the A/Ipha7

and O/mega7 for each single tone.'' This sounds very well,

if somewhat mysterious. It would have a certain meaning for

a string instrument; it has no meaning, however, for the piano.

How does the brain accomplish its effect,. considering the dead

mechanism inserted between the fingertip and the string? Germer

thinks 1) the emotional intensity, the inner nervous partici­

pation of the player, 2) the fine nervous sense of the finger­

tips can be considered sufficient to bridge th::..._ cap. He be­

lieves quite seriously in the influence on string excitation

Page 43: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

37

by these means. No less strange is Germer's insistence that

singing piano sound is called forth by a special manner of

tone excitation, the pressing principle. And hm.,r does he prove

it? With bold poetic license, he takes the comprehensive dis­

cussion of Helmholtz on the origin of overtones according to

the point of attack chosen ~ the piano manufacturer as a proof

of the influence on the string in his own meaning. Throu~h

~~is he arrives at the fantastic idea that the origi~ of over­

tones can be determined by the player's method of attack. I

cite Germer's words: "The scientific observations of Helmholtz

are calculated to clear up much which the thoughtful pianist

has perhaps already found out for himself by chance in an em­

pirical, practical way or has at least instinctively put into

practice, guided by his natural impulses."

It would be interesting to know if anyone else has ever

been taken aback by this sort of highly subjective reasoning,

plucked out of thin air.

The danger for technique, for natural execution and honest

skill lies obviously in the fact that by making subtle or coarse

self-deception possible the pianist prepares the ground for

dishonest seeking after originality--the ground in which not

only obscurity and self-complacency thrive, but in which all

sorts of subjective, uncritical teaching systems spring up.

An inevitable consequence is the over-estimation of the creative

capacity of the artist and an under-estimation of strict sci­

entific discipline of thought. Unfortunately, artists have

Page 44: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

38

always found the latter a burdensome fetter. To sum up the

previous observations: 1) the strength of attack as the ex­

clusive influence on piano tone, and 2) the momentary char­

acter of tone formation, are the points which are not cor­

rectly understood. The instrument requires, therefore, a

motion of attack which

1) is adapted to the momentary effect on the key,

t~.~=eby expending no useless energy on longer downward pres­

sure,

2) exploits all possible degrees of intensity from

the minimum to the maximum artistically permissible.

Page 45: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

SECTION III

THE MISUNDERSTANDING OF PHYSIOLOGICAL PRACTICE, TilE FOUNDATION OF TECHNIQUE

26. We have acknowledged and established that technique

without practice is unthinkable (8). Until now technique

cculd not be correctly understood in its true meanin~ because

the physiology of motion while practicing remained something

foreign to piano playing theory. Although it is quite a

simple matter to show that the movements of the hands and

fingers in piano playing can not be any different from those

in other pursuits, this apparently obvious idea has been ig­

nored and even turned around into its opposite (38). One

often hears that special, entirely new and individual artis­

tic movements have to be acquired and created for piano plAy­

ing. Werkenthin, in his instruction manual of piano playing

(Berlin 1889, 22 ci~.), says, "The independent movement of,

individual fingers, as demanded in piano playing, is an en­

tirely unaccustomed and in a certain sense unnatural, arti­

ficial one for man. On this account its acquisition causes

the greatest difficulty." Werkenthin is doubtless correct

concerning the difficulties. The typical fundamental error

of Werkenthin, and of many others, is that they regard the

usual, natural, simple attack as false and differentiate it

from the artificial, spiritually vital, psycho-physical--or

39

Page 46: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

40

whatever the other expressions may be--as the only true one.

All authors are in agreement in so far as they insist they are

building on "fundamental laws," and that they are supported by

a "natural and coherently founded system. 11 All this is more

or less clearly put forth in the preface or introduction.

Afterwards, however, they identify technical movements as

"artificial." They picture these rnovements as different from

the natural ones of beginners--movements which must be sup­

pressed. Has no one become aware of this contradiction? New

"artistic movements" are continually being discovered. Hmv­

ever, the movements here are actually the same as elsewhere,

in spite of their special final purpose. Because it is only a

matter of a different final purpose, that which differentiates

the movements in piano technique from others cannot be sought

in the fingers, hands and arms. The difference is to be locat­

ed in the brain, as the organ of the spirit. Practicing is es­

sentially intellectual work, an intellectual learning process.

27. When practice is separated from its spiritual and essen­

tial content, technique is taken out of its organic context.

It descends then to the level of one-sided gymnastics of the

muscles and joints. The end result is a lifeless, one-sided

virtuosity of the most superficial kind. All technique is

normally nothing but a means to a specific end; in art the

end is controlled and determined by the intellect.

28. In brief, practice is an adaptation (or rather a whole

complex of adaptive phenomena of a physical and psychic nature)

Page 47: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

41

for a specific purpose and involves every cell of the body

in varying degrees. Since all movement originates in the

central organ, practice concerns primarily the central organ,

the brain and the spinal marrow. Accordingly, practice is

predominantly a process of the mind, intellectual labor, a

storing up of experience gleaned from the body itself--memory. 1

This memory is of such absolute faithfulness that it gives the

impression of being almost mechanical and seems, to the casual

observer, to have nothing of a spiritual content. A fatal

mistake, for adaptation assumes a procedure planned and pur­

poseful. It does not become less intellectual because we are

not ordinarily consciously aware of it. It seems that the

apparently purely mechanical process--and we call these things

mechanical only in an imaginative or figurative sense--has

given rise to many false notions in the minds of laymen when

the same motions are practiced over and over again. Breit­

haupt's conception is therefore particularly significant.

According to him, the control of the brain, if it descends

to an automatic function like that of the ordinary memory

process, "would be reduced to a minimum participation of the

brain!' (Natuerliche I<laviertechnik, 3rd edition, p. 247).

Apparently brain and consciousness are simply interchangeable

expressions. The pianist reading this is naturally confirmed

lsemi Meyer, Uebung und Gedaechtn~s. Wiesbaden, 1904. Pam­phlet No. 30 or-the series of aiscussions in the field of the life of the psyche and nerves.

Page 48: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

42

in the false idea that the activity of the brain in practicing

is ultimately minimal and that everything is a question of

muscle gymnastics. This idea is just exactly the one which

must be combatted.

The practice of bodily motions comprises a whole scale

of adaptations. These begin on the lowest level with bones,

joints, tendons, muscles and so forth--that is, with the me­

chanical part of the motive apparatus. They extend further

to the organs of sense perception--skin, eyes and ears--and

ascend on the ultimate and highest level to the intellectual

center for movement and the senses--to the seat of the will,

the conscious psyche. The kind, degree and extent of adapta­

tion is determined by the nature of the work and its purpose.

It is one thing for rough physical work, another for fine

artistic activity. It enlists the directed mechanical appa­

ratus and the directing psychic organism in varying degrees.

Neither operates alone without the controlling center.

29. Even the simplest procedure involving motion presumes a

many-sided adaptation in advance. Although even the simplest

movement always involves more than a single muscle, we shall,

for reasons of simplicity, first observe the effect of an

isolated muscle on a joint.

The form of the muscles and the joint construction are

already placed by nature in a certain co-ordinated relation­

ship. In addition ~he organic contracting power of the muscle

is adapted from the earliest development of the body to the

Page 49: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

43

inorganic forces of weight, elasticity, function, etc. This

is true for every degree of muscular effort, the maximum as

well as the minimum. Each of the countless mental impulses

which, in the course of the body's growth, has caused a muscle

to contract for a certain specific purpose has contributed in

putting muscles, bones and joints into a certain reciprocal,

interdependent relationship in regard to strength and form.

Our whole organism carries, therefore, the imprint of an

infinitely varied process of adaptation to nature and its

powers, as well as to its own members. A large part of this

adaptation is obviously inborn as inherited property; the rest

is acquired by development. It can be seen how practice and

adaptation comprise our whole life and being.

30. It is, therefore, at the very least inaccurate if (as is

-usual) one begins the observation of technical motion phenomena

with the impulse of the will and disregards the whole sum of

preceding instances of adaptation, whether received by the

organism as a native inheritance or whether acquired through

experience or training. Technique is that which is acquired.

It is the most important part because it has been won through

practice and collected experience, from childhood on. Every

occurrence of movement is supported by experience acquired

long before. The individual impulse of motion would have no

sense if it were not most exactly tailored through countless

earlier experiences to fit the proper angle of the two adjoin­

ing bones, the prope~ velocity and the proper strength. The

·'

Page 50: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

44

most essential thing, then, is that which is already present:

the knowledge gained through experience of the mass and size

relationships involved in motion. This knowledge lies like

a guide in the brain, complete but continually becoming more

perfect, ready to be put into action at a moment's notice.

31. Here the first activities of the child--walking and

grasping--afford instructive examples. In acquiring these

most basic of all movements a wealth of experience and intel­

lectual preparatory work is accumulated. From this experience

all later movements--even the most artistic--are created.

In the first months the child tries to grasp completely

without co-ordination. He gropes around in the air and takes

months before he learns to grasp something with the hands.

Gradually he begins to see and grasp simultaneously and learns

still much later to grasp directly with the eye as a guide.

(Ziehen, according to Wundt.) The sum of what is learned in

'the first year of life is enormously great. The great con­

trast between the beginning and end of this first learning

period lies in the inner development of the brain and not in

the muscles. The child already had his fingers at the begin­

ning of this period and would have been able to grasp with

them had the brain only known what grasping was. The seat

of motion is, in the final and true analysis, the brain. This

is illustrated by certain brain diseases and adult injuries,

through which it can happen that the muscles, although they

are not in the least·diseased, can no longer be put into motion.

Page 51: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

45

It is the same with learning to walk. With the body

correctly supported, walking must be tried, gauged and tried

again step by step. In short, a great deal must be learned

and experienced before a secure, perfect forward motion can

be accomplished. What is, however, still more remarkable is

the fact that this great mass of assembled knowledge and capa­

bility, learned through daily trial and error and whose acqui­

sition has demanded such a long time, practically vanishes from

the memory and consciousness. We are no longer aware of those

early ground-laying attempts. We feel ourselves capable of

grasping, walking and countless other movements involving every

limb correctly and purposefully, without having to pay constant

attention to them. We grasp and walk mechanically like auto­

matic machines. This automatic quality is, however, none the

less intellectual. It has its "seat" in the central organ

and not, as the layman is prone to believe, in the fingers,

muscles, skin or some other place in the purely mechnical part

of our organs of motion. The whole storehouse of experience

and drill lies customarily in the region of the subconscious,

not really in the unconscious, for at any moment we can bring

any individual proceeding of walking and grasping, which has

become mechanical, back out into full consciousness. We can

pursue and inspect every step in its smallest detail. Indeed,

we often do this involuntarily whenever the procedure which

has long become automatic suffers any sort of small inter­

ference--hitti~g an obstacle or missing an object because of

Page 52: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

its chan~ed position. '-' .

!. ~ .... - ..... ;

other, needs r:o .::ct:_ve control, a:1d can be Zelle'::--:..:~ :.:o sin::

do-v,n once more into tl-:.s subcor:sc::..~·.:.s.

.. .. ,

32. The surn tot&l of t:-.. :s is 1) ~· ..... :.. :.:_::-... c c..:....~~_.~ . .,::;, .L.C

of accu::;ulated expeTience precedes evc:.:::y 2)

the rnost fluent motion, however rnec~anical it appears to have

b i . . ecorne, · s ana remalns an

c~ o~r intc:lcct,

in

conscim..:.s112Ss.

and under this threshold

and in the mechanical fa::..~~fulness of the process. It :l.s a

piece of inner freedom \·Jhose possession <J.j_id use in r::.akLc:g music

d f- • , t . •', ' ~ . , . (J~r. \ we o no .... \>vlS~'1 o encu:.1oer Wl en. an unna cural ::ecn.n::.que · u J.

One may become deceived about the mechanical nature of

long practiced motion due to

and control run back and forth contir.c:.ously betwe2n

center and the extremities, muscles and skin of the

a rapidity which has its well-!mo'im anaiogy in the celegraph

\vire.

takes place in an incomprehensibly small insta~t of tiDe.

The impulse of the will travels so quickly to the :::!Uscle ::hat

the desire to r::ove and the ::nove:::-:::r.c::

may account fqr the notion that t~e w~l:

to c-~:_:

. .-, ........... -:--.•" ... ·. c~ ~ ...)'.. ..... _.-~ '-~

Page 53: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

in r~nge~ itsel.: ..

this not:~on, however.

illusio:1. On nc-

' . o.s.s:..s

place.

only an j~:r\_~; t:.=-t_:_:~~-2;i_·~ ~

')') .J.J.

neous.

-------·--

fc:c

cials. The local officiels

tl:e ce1:'"':.te::s of

. . . 1 ora~nar:.. y

...... .. :...

i:1.sp·ircd

-~. . ' " ..... ~· :' ...... -· ........ ~ ._ - - .... \.I

" . ") .. ' ~ ... p' .

'-:-/

~ ·-- .-.. "' f-. ~ ;_, . __ ;

. . ~-::. 0 ~,·_- ~~-·

./" .- ...... v .._ ... ·.;.,.. -~

;-'--, r. ~,... .... .._

:._~ ... ~ L.!.;.G ::... .... <~:_\/:..G.L:.tLi.. c~:..~.:~:\.:-~c

except v,:hen there disturbances or other special rensons.

out report3

"'" -:-.· .. , -~ r, ~.,' -- ........ "-<•~

.• "• ...

/"- .... ::. v .. :.·-

i,'" -~. --~ ·-, .•""": ~ .. - ~-' ,{.....)

' r~~:-::..s ,~

Page 54: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

L:.s

t . 11 . - ' . . ~- .. con r.nua ... y :i.n·c:orrnea aoot:!.:: every <::~:... -ce:.:-2 .::::..c,~-: - · · · of 0::: f->OS:LCl.Ol-"1 -

the limbs and about eve~ the s2cllcs~ sot~an.

cc:n-

ter, there c:nnol:nCe the conci tion 0 2 r::cvc::ne:;. t ar:.d :-:,:.::.e: po S S i-

ble uninterrupted control and co::::c:::;ct::..c:'l_ cc.n ;;c;: c:..\.:-idec into

the followin3 groups:

1. The senses of the skin, principally the e:: t:::e::nc ly

sensitive fingertips: touch, pressure, place and te~perature

senses.

2. r~·

}.. .. :2 sense of tc~sion in ?.. ~·-l 1-< '~ ::",~ ·":" .. , 1-.o ~·- ,_) ~.: \,....,.. • •• '

.,... • ~ ~·· -~"-> ,.... '• l..-~\....-~ ,··~ ·- ~-....::. '-" '!.1

etc.

as continu.::lly vc:rying t..:-:.._.,;io~'ls.

joints--'t·lhich aids in pe:::ceivinz e?c::n the s::tallest angular

displacement of the joint 0 s sur:aces.

4. The sense of muscular the n~:r._2scle

which helps to keep the center :.;:-:.icl.-:-~:ed of the

ness in the muscle fibers.

34. ~ t d • 1., +-' -'-~upper e Dy a L ~~e repor~s

in musical technique--hearing, the muscle ce~ter is enabled to

regulate the angle between the

direction, force, ro.te of speed~ etc.; that is, to adapt v}ith.

'tvhich strea:n in further,

Page 55: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

/ '

Cc "'SS 0.;: .,_he .,..en-,,lat·' 0'1 ~.,....d "O'"nt-....,·."-.:: -~-S U <.:: • J... '- ..._ b ~ J... 1 ca. c. '-'-l ~ ''-" - - u, • ,

ited in the "subconscious'' \vhere they can 'be b::o-:...:.;_);:: c1..:t .. ::..n

at some future time to continue the ada?tatio~ ~ ---:~ --- ......... -:""~ ~ c -( ........ "':"" ....

-- v... . ............. ..,.., ~-

was previously interrupted.

of adaptation.

the training is out of the roughest stages.

As we have bu~ c::11

leap out into full consciot:.snes s at any instant, i.e. , vlh "'':.ever

occurs. For i~stance, should we st::ike a false nc~c, scratch

apparatus again beco:nes i::-:,:1ediately m;.d conscicus3.y active.

The attention is directed tcv;rards the fault. The 1.1hole pro-

cedure is broun-ht 0 out of tl1e subconscious into cl2ar conscious-

ness. It is revised and not pe:.:\·;:itted to sink do\m agai11 until

the whole detailed procedure has once again been adapted to

the purpose, the "ideal" {32).

35. Only t ho ao~l 0~ ~he rov~~~~~ .i ··~ ,'-"'\ u ...... __..:::::. ~ .... .'. ...:..~.._;._~._ .. .._ ~ the intention or purpose,

is continually con::;c:::.c'-"s to us. \ie expe-r~d useless effort

-v;re tr".l to make vJhet is naturally c.:-: t:.ncor!scious procedure Lito

a conscious one.

all of the skin sensations in co~~acting the keys and tries

consciously to.utilize the~. Soc2 musicians attempt to train

the touch sensation in the fingertips consciously. M. Jaell,

Page 56: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

50

of ~veber' s touch circles) into the fou~c:ati.on oi a '\;>.ole sys-

tern. It reaches its peak in the se~te~ce (p. 18): :he ~usicnl

value of the playing stands in insoluble connection with culti-

vated key consciousness. 11 Tone co:c:::-'j is dc:Dendent upon sc::1.si-

tivity of touch. Can Jaell have confused the feeling of greater

weight on the fingertips--as occurs in the sw~nsi.ng moti.on when

the arm is passively carried by the fingers (rotation en the

finger, 88)--with a more intense touch sensation? In contrast

let it be stated once r.:o:::-e 'ivhat physiology teaches in this con-

nection.

1. ..,...h t , ' . ' 1 e oucn sense, wn~cn has to do only 'i.vi th sensing

the outer surface of an object, plays a completely subordinate

role in the attack.

2. The sense of ~s the essential skin sense

involved in the attack~ It has nothing to do, hmvever, vlith

the touch sense.

3. The skin Eressure sens:;t:":..c::!s involved in the att.:ack

are and remain constantly unconsc~ous beca~se of their nature

and serve the central organ as control ~echanisns for all ~o-

tion. To desire to make them conscious ~s nonsense.

Frau Jaell provides an outstanding example of how far one

can work himself into a falsely grcuncecl system of tho,oht • ~0 '

thereby removing all solid ground from under the feet. Her

whole .system is built up on a sort of nervous over-se~sibility

of the sense of touch in an over 2cute inner

excitement summoned up by muscul.:::::: .::.:;itation. ~,"~.c:: usc.::ess

Page 57: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

51

~.;ork has been ' . e~<per:ccc 0:1 it.

.. , ..., ~ . ...,

GO~Otl2SS qu~CKly

give up the a~te~pt to .... t - -. ~ ~ pene~ra e Ja211 s nur~y :.\s

on several other poin~s, Jaell

in regard to ~~e touch se~se.

to cultivate the touch sense.

technical perception. ,.,., h . ( ' ,... • 1ec.n~aue aet~nc~ by ~i~ in the oost

varied ways) has to do ':Ji th the fi.ngc:,:ti.p :.1.e:.-ves.

apparatus shoul.d

technical perception to include the

of vleight, etc. l.S '1,",7·~ r~~ 'lo ~ ...,._ ...........

ty , 't ' "1 .. , "' 'I ' wnat tne re~atLonsn~~ oetween

and consc~ous~~cs ic r~? this 1... • ..... -..;........, -v:i c... ..........

of all for t 1" ~. n,.,.:;: ,._,-~_,"',..,... .... - t "-"- _v ........ ~-J.. •

should exert h~mself in order to ma~e all mot~ons clearly con-

scious or if he may allow his technique to descc~d to an auto-

matic function. Only one way can be correct.

physiological material vJhich Brc:ithaupt requil.·c:s i:o be le.::;.:.:ned

contrasts sharply <;vith his ovm sentence "t·Ih::..ch says that pi.a:c1o

technique is based on simple natural move:nent. If it is r1.:::.tu-

ral movement as in walking and running, then hov7 can it con-

sist simultaneously of the conscious exact --------' ' minute function-

ing of a co~pletely controlled mechanism or in the tireless

practice for fluency and independence of

Page 58: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

52

Increasing the sensitivity of touch perception ~auld ~e

of use only if one wished to acquire more exact infc~~ation

about the surface form of an object, as the blind are forced

to cultivate their sense of touch. all

concerned with the touch sense, the by

all piano theoreticians. The surface c~ the ?ia~~ ~CJ ~s a

matter of complete indifference. Appare~t:y the sense or

pressure is intended; i.e., that capacity of our sk ·1;s sense

j- b f.: ' • h ..... t t sys ~em y means o..: 'tvfl.J..C;, L.Cle ex en of Drcssure on ~he skin

is made knmvn to the central organ. I 'llSC: the te::,n, '1central

organ," intentionally, for it is an excel)tio11

stimuli reach the conscious mind.

Fortunately for our ir1.1l.er ease and freedom of mind all

of these perceptions of pressure 't,lhich acco:T!pnny ocr n-:::::>vements

and are necess.:::ry to their gradation a:r:.d regulation occu:: to-

tally below the conscious level. T~e pressure se~se in the

attack is nothing very important. T::.c: r:.uscular positio:1 ~nd

motion senses (33) play a much g:rc:ater role.

possible to evaluate these senses because they are totally

unconscious. In any case, one-sided cultivation oi the skin's

senses 'tvhich proposes to nake the~ consciot:~ fails to .s.ckno-v.Jl-

edge the skin's real and most important activity--th2t is,

what happens unconsciously. This unconscious activity beco:r:es

ever more refined in its work bf control as the motion i:self

tions are as purposeless as they are unn2..turc:l. ::=:::-~ add:.c:::..on,

Page 59: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

tions -vJOuld claim one's \.·lhole attention and divert it f::o:7l

music into a field co~?!etely foreign to it. As ~s well

at a time.

arrangement mentioned above. It al~ows ~s to d~v~te cur-

selvas with all of our powers to the art object ~~d to cxecu~e

the mechanical-technical functions securely 2nd

the subconscious -v;here they may be left to ther:1sel ves. ~·Je

should surrender ourselves without lirJitation to this su?eri-

or characteristic of our oody as r;:uch as He can, \.vithout try-

ing to improve and experinent Oi.1 it. He vdll thus sc.vc;; the

intellect from a useless burden.

36. In section 29 tve took the movement of a sin_:;le muscle

as an example because of its simplicity, even though this does

not correspond to a real situation. In reality only motions

involving several muscle1 occur, because the mechan:cal dis-

position of the joints, the effect of the muscles on the bones

"as on a one or tvlO armed lever" requires it. Eve::-1 the:: sim-

plest movement is a combination. For example, sicp:'..2 <; , ..

oencnng

or stretching of a limb is always executed by a grou? of :-:;us-

cles, working together or synergetically. In addition there

is the simultaneous activity of the opposing forces, the an-

tagonists. It is true that stretching and bending a~e opposed

and operate in tun1, but this opposition, this anta:;cnis:n,

serves also to limit, to gradate the movement, and to rr12.~-ce

Page 60: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

it precise.

muscular structure, antagonism and syncrgisc--are inseparably

woven together.

The inner reciproc~l

more clearly if one considers

• • t-JO~n .... This influence cc~:-1. be cl-:.:::ractc:.·:_zed c:s S\..:.~_.:.:::1 to the

purpose of the whole nove~ent--cc~Dletinq~ . ~ -,

porting it, but also resist-

One should note that all of the jo~nts £S far as ~ .2 upper

part of the a~-r:1 are free to move in space, ti.-u::..t t>.e Hl-:.ol.e ar.:n

. d d ... h . ld ' ' .,_ . . "-~s suspente Lrom t.e suou er ana cnesL JO~nLs ( 5 ? ,_ -). ~or

this reason even the smallest ~· t r:1.ngcr tr:ove:nen has an effect

as far as this joint, \·lhether one Hant:: it to or r-:o·::.

'"'"" . 1 ~ t . h . - t' ~ne reclproca rela ~ons .~p ot ne finser and hand r.1us-

actions. One would have no effect Hithout t!ie other; that is,

if the hand muscles did not hold the 'l.,n:ist firm in exactly

the right way, the pm·ler of the finger muscles would be lost

through the lack of steadiness. energy would ~ot succeed

in reaching the fingers themselves. The ess2nti~~ criterion

of all these nrocedur·es is that they are acco:cdin.;. ·co rule

and completely unconscious.

An example: Stretch out the hand and fingers so th2.·t they

are in a strc:.i:J;h!: line Yl:"_::h the forea:cm.

and fingers quicldy ' 2.l1G fist

Page 61: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

55

the hand is bent back in relation to the forea~-::1. 'l':1is dis-

cernible relationship vJith the other J"oints apoears of course - '

in reverse, when the hand is opened. ~,mat is cor.cerned here

is unconscious antagonism and synergism, inde?e~dc~t of the

will and completely ada~) ted to the p'-lrposc. I 1: cs.n b·e o bsc::-vcd

in varying degrees of strength clar:..ty

movement of attack as well (51).

37. The more complex a motion is, the r:-:ore muscle groups take:

part. The synchronized, co-ordinated arrangement of the whole

motion, the exact fitting of each part of into the

right place at the right time beco~:1es all the rJore important.

A bending or stretching muscle can only bend or stretch.

can do nothing else. The question is, with how much effort

does it participate at a~y chosen instant in the co-ordinated

movement? That is the c:~::~.:;f poL-"t. Tb.is is vJhat is involved

in the delicate psychic work of c:!..s-::_ buti:1g the central im-

pulses and in practicing the whoLe nover.:.ent. Precise co-

ordination and delicate timing of simultaneous and successive

single actions are such obvious psychiq processes that the

meaning of the sentence, "Practice is psychic vmrk in its very

nature, 11 becomes immediately clear in the light of it. T+­..._._

might be helpful to observe a coarser co-ordinated ::r.otion,

such as lifting an object from the floor, jumping over an

obstacle, pulling on a boot or something similar and to in-

vestigate it exactly in detail -v:rhile executing it rcpec:;:eclly.

The piano attack is more delicate but no less complicated.

Page 62: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

-,-)0

An extraordinarily exact and grad2d afte~-, oppos22-, and

sympathetic effect of all kinds of muscles travels c:Q'\,·:':?1 ~::c:-:t

the torso and shoulder to the snall finger muscles.

33. It is a physiological lm.;r tha.c

in a co-ordinated movement v.rhich c.::"::.:

~t~h~i~nQg _a_t _a_l_l-_t_o _i_t--_ev_·_e~ __ i_f the~

in a grou2. This se:"1tence can not be er:~phasized c::ou3h.

explains much in -muscular mechanics that is other:;ise incom-

prehensible. The selection of the approp:-iate ::.uscl.es or parts

of rnus cles occurs thoroughly unconscious to us, nol-:2theless

with absolute correctness and reliability. This s2lection

involves a rejection of all muscles u:1.ich ;E .. ::e ccc!trary to the

purpose and which atte-mpt to partici?ate involuntarily at

first. In the beginning there is al\vays , . . excess--tne ceg1n-

ner's purposeless and extravagant expenditure of energy. That

this excess, as everyone l\.nmv-s :Eroi':1 experience, is reduced to

the correct amount, speaks for a lm.·; of conservation of energy

followed conscientiously by our o~ganism. This conserv~tion

The lm.;r reads: _.§.secure, smooth "' ., .. .. l - ' ana oralnar1 y success£UL save----- - ---ment requires only iust ~s rnuc~ ~Jscular ener~y as co~resoonds __ ;...;....:_ --

in aesthetically satisfying appearance (86). ReguL:.::ly .s.ncl

according to experience all training proceeds fran t~c s&xinum,

f t , ... d ' . - - . . rom ne was :...e ener2:y anG over-exert1.on o:: t~"1e Dc:·:·::..nner. lo..J .._... ~

the rough to the fine technique. rfhis is \·Jell k:'lO'.·n::..

Page 63: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

57

Perhaps the best-knmvn part o:Z oracticinz is the initi.c;.l .. .. .. ~

elimination of so-called svmoathet5_c ;~1otiCI"lS--that is, those

motions VJhich the members on the right side of the body r:1akc

involuntarily VJith those on the lc~~ a~6 vice versa. Actually

this is only the most obvious, crudest bc::;:...nr"1.rr2; s tc.ge. P:-qsio-

logically much more important and much c.::e

the accompanying motions--that is, the purposeless ~ovemcnts

of beginners mentioned before. Neighboring muscles and parts

of muscles arc drmv-:1. i:-:voluntarily i;:;.to t:·w musculc:cr action

. 1 d . '. . . ~ t. 1nvo ve 1n cne pr1nc1.pai mo 1on.

companying motions gradually become smaller and weak2r and

eventually are entirely eliminated. T'ne mo:::e fc..:-:.i::..ia::: a mo-

tion is, the more accompanying motions are avoided. 7his ex-

plains the clumsy, angular and ungainly natu::e of unaccustomed

and unfamiliar motions.

Thus the body achieves its ends completely differently,

in exactly the opposite fashion from the Hay the honorable

music teachers believe to be cor::ect. They insist that r:~ove-

ments "totally new and previously unfamiliar to the body, 11

so-called artistic movements,must be drilled (26). Exactly

the opposite is the case. vfuen a nevl task appears the body

extracts and chooses the suitable motions fran the mass of

long known and familiar ones which the normal body has com-

manded from childhood. The body seeks, so to speak, to forget

and exclude those 'l:vhich are not sui table. This is tl1.e trick.

If we apply this correctly, our slogan vJould be: F:::·eedom to

Page 64: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

58

the limbs, let go, do not hold back o~ fix for the

body left to itself finds its ovm r.?lay and 'l.vith such c-.:.bsolutc

security that it never lets itself wander or be div2rted from

its goal even through distortion and violence. \,k~ a:..-e 1:10t

speaking, of course, of unbridled license. This shoulcl not

be feared. The limitations of mechanical laws guard asainst

that. I hope to be spared this misunderstanding. I would

like, hmvever, to point out here hmv quickly certain people

are al-vmys ready with the rejoinder, "unbridled license."

This happens even when it does not enter into the question,

\vhen it is merely a matter of the body following its m:-r.n. laws.

Such people are sNayed by the fear that their o'i.vn "arb1..trary

limitations, 112 vJhich they have foolishly drm·m up ' c.na pro-

pounded as higher laws, vlill be punctured.

39. If practice really is essentially an intellectual process,

this should manifest itself in practical experience. Every

musician knmvs by personal observation how much more quickly

he masters a piece of music technically when he has heard the

piece previously than \vhen it is fully ne\v. One cc:n, so to

speak, practice mentally--"prepare the ground. 11 The pertinent

studies of 0. Raif are unfortunately too little knO\'ln in music

circles. In its critical objectivity, 0. Raif's s~all but

weighty work, ')

"Ueber Fingerfertigkeit beim :<lavierspiel, 11 '-"'

2steinhausen makes a pun here between the vmrds sd-,::.:-c::;.~<:enlose hlillkuer (unbridled license) c>...nd willku•2rliche Sc!.~-:?2:1ken ---(arbitrary limitations). ---·--

3In Stumpf's essays in Akoustik und t1usikHis~:::nscL<c::r:) Vol. ::r, p. 65.

Page 65: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

59

excels so many analagous scientific works by professional

musicians. The fundamental idea lies in Dointing to t~c fact

that the origin of finger dexterity is to be found 11ot in

fingers but in the central organ. This fact is certainly not

neT.v, but it is almost wholly unreco~nizcd by the rr:c::nbers of

his profession. Through experin:2nt, 1\:::L f ' ~2S

number of psychic influences on technique. Bec.::use: of their

interest a perusal of the book is recon:racnded. E~:.i. :Z e:npha-

sizes the facts only. The present Hork hopes to pl..-cvide the

explanation.

For example, Raif had students practice for a :ens ti~e with only one hand. It happened that the other h21d, althouzh

not trained, had achieved almost the s&:ne; incre2.Ssd flexibility

as the hand \vhich had practiced. The phencr.1enon that one can

accomplish something later that he could not do earlier, with-

out practicing in the meantime, is, it is true, an ordinary

experience, but it is especially applicable to the inner

maturing process, to the quiet progress in mastering technical

difficulties on a musical instJ..'"U:-Jent.

A phrase in psycho-physiology gives a general formulation

for it: The energy of movement is deteJ..tnined by the intensity

of the conception which unleashes it. The imagin:::d concept

is revealed, as far as possible, in this movement. With an

artist, the intensity of his artistic ideal, of the vital

inner concept of the art object, is transformed into c.:::-ti.E:t::..c

activity. with a musician this r.::eans transfo::-m:d ir:to ti:..::.:

Page 66: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

60

technical movements -v;hich he is continu~lly adaptir~g to an

absolute form (34).

40. Because the most obvious ~~d l~sti~3 e~fcct o~ )=acticc

has always been thought to be the esc-:;ential thing i:1 ')!",':":C-

tieing, although it is really only secondary. This error is

still quite generally widespread among ffiusicians. Certainly

the close connection in the muscles betHeen -v;o:::!( output,

burning of energy and nourishment is most obvio~sly pronounced.

A muscle, as a power machine, gains visibly in power and size

through labor. It cannot adapt itself to increased demands

in any other way than through increased size. ~ie adaptation

of bones and joints comes to light in the increase: in length,

size and firnmess, principally 'tvi th still-grmving organisms.

On the other hand we knm,l next to nothing of physical , cnanges

in the brain as a consequence of practice and just as little

about such changes in the nerve fibres which, ho\vever, only

play the part of conducting cables. ~'Je knoH only from personal

experience that a lasting spacial disposition (r.-iundt) remains

in the mind after each repetition of motion 't·lhich makes every

ne'tv repetition easier. For the vlhole co'Utprehensive psychic

process of practice, however, this change in the brain, t·Jhich

can only be very slight in any case, is more sienificant than

the greates~ increase in muscular size. For a beginner on

the piano no amount of prev:':.ous muscular training vJill be of

Page 67: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

61

use to him, ho-v;rever zealously he may have pursued it. He must

first learn to ':.vork. mentally. He may have stronger muscles

and more supple joints than a good, experienced pianist. ~fuat

he lacks, however, is the network of brain channels, the psychic

property of technique, the sum of psycho-physicc:l experiences

and intellectually won automatic responses stored up irl the

brain.

41. For this reason it must be stressed that all of these

adaptations are directed specifically towards the motion to

be trained. Therefore one cannot ma:.<e the motive a~:x:u:atus

more fit for piano playing by means of other vlork, least of

all by rough Hork such as wood choryuing. The same 2;02S for . . '-'

any kind of work, even for fine vmrl< in so fc.r as it is rough-

er than piano playing and thus b~~nss about 2 stroncer mechan-

ical influence on the motive apparatus and its material co~-

position. To formulate a general statement: one cannot prac-

tice movement A by movement B. ...,, . l . l LnJ..s og~ca conclusion must

be fearlessly recognized, however strange it may appear to

some, if mistakes are to be avoided.

It is an entirely different matter v~4en gymnastics are

practiced for reasons of health. The efforts are made con-

sciously one-sided in order to bring weak or crippled muscles

back to normal or increased capacity. This can be done through

mechanical resistance capable of being regulated and through

mechanical or localized electrical stimuli.

Page 68: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

62

Tumbling and all kinds of sport (45) belons to hygienic

muscular work. If the artist v1ishes to avoid fatigue or ev;:;n

exhaustion, he cannot dispense with such bodily exercise any

more than can other men. \-Jhere his limit is, just v1hat rou~h

muscular work may be pursued without danger or injury to his

fine manual technique, each individual must find out for him­

self. No general rule can be stated for this.

42. In tvhat follm·7S we shall be speaking frequently of active

and passive movement. He need some explanation of these terms.

Activity is a condition of motion, passivity a co~dition of

relaxation or rest in the muscles. Active movements are gen­

erated (exclusively) by momentary or continuous musc~lar con­

traction ( 68). Passive motions, on the other ha.."1d, are gen­

erated by any of the other forces--i.e., by tveight and el.s.s­

ticity as well as by any sort of exterior pm·Yer or by the

muscular force of someone else. \·lith this in mind doctors

practice passive movements with their patients. In this way

the patient learns, with considerable effort, to exclude all

active participation and to relax his limbs. The difficulty

is that the feeling of passivity, of relaxation, is unfamiliar

and unaccustomed for most people and has to be first acquired

and practiced. This is because the tendency toward active

and conscious intervention persists and is difficult to un­

learn. We are concerned here, in fact, with a process of un­

learning (38). Attention plays a large part in this, too. If

Page 69: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

63

the attention is diverted, a passive cor.dit:on or a condition

of rest occurs in the muscles of its o~~ acco~d. Difficulties

arise, then, 'tvhen the attention has to be directed tm·Jc:r-:is

practicing, as is inevitable at first 't·:rhen technical :notions

are worked out. The process of un-1 :a.rning this alertness,

which interferes and controls unnecessarily, is 1 in reality,

an intellectual procedure. The greatest possible relaxation

to the point of passivity plays a ve~7 significant role in

piano technique (77).

Page 70: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

SZCTION IV

THE ER..q,QNEOUS APPLICATION OF G'.i.'X0!AST!CS OF ~iUSCLSS AND JOINTS IN PIANO TS(Ji·EHQU2

43. As mentioned several times before, a cu~iously t&isc

basic view of the nature of practice as

muscles and joints has developed in the course of time. A

number of typical errors in piano technique find tl:.:c:ir ex-

planatio:-1 in this vier.v. All of the: errors ~vhich have so

arisen are closely related, although they seem to pursue very

different aims. ~ .. 'hat they have in common is that all are:

limited to the mere physical \vorking of the org:.:ns ~ to the

mechanical motive apparatus (28), and they all wore or less

ignore the higher psychic elements.

The errors are expressed in the following list of aims:

1. to make the motive apparatus muscular,

2. to make it flexible,

3. to isolate the individual parts and make them inde­

pendent,

4. to equalize the differences in the five fingers.

44. The origin of gymnastic finger exercise--i.e., a n1ethod-

ical attempt to strengthen finger muscles--can be traced back

to the resuscitation of gymnastic bodily exercise at the end

of the eighteenth and the beginning of the ninetee::·:th eel:.-

turies. It can be understood hmv the mechanical st::-'-".Ct:L::::-e

64

Page 71: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

65

of the piano fostered such efforts. According to H. Riemann,

the five-finger exercises of A. E. :vfueller (in their seventh

edition as early as 1818) are probably the oldest gymnastic

primer for the piano. Later, under the influence of Swedish

h d. . . ' , f' . ort.opae ~c gymnast~cs, one-s~aea _lnger exe~cLse <ll1C1 tr-aining

became the universal panacea for musicians and dilettantes.

Germer, for example. (.Q.E. cit., p. 10), recommends vlhat co::1

only be termed violent stretching of the metacarpal joints--

of course, only to accommodate high lifting of fingers before

the attack. At the same time he himself warns of excess.

wbere and how the limits are found, hmvever, is not said.

Naturally, the poor, misguided beginner proceeds to \·JOrk, at

the expense of health. According to Bi.e (on. cit., p. 166 ff.),

Czerny discovered the "great secret"--that no explanation of

fingering is of any practical assistance, hm·1ever learned and

systematic, but that finger training must be based on purely

mechanical g~~astics. The statements of Bie (p. 275) are

also typical. In logical (?) extension of Czerny 1 s teaching,

the hands are to be prepared for piano playing by finger drills

and by stretching the joints, thus completing a larze part of

the gymnastic training before actual musical activity be3ins.

It would seem that Jackson1 in the 1860's reached the high­

point of mechanical training divorced from music in his fi~3er

and wrist gymnastics. His brochure,which makes an unple.::.sant

1Jackson, Die Finger und Handgyrr~astik.

Page 72: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

effect by its ostentatious self-advertise~c=nt, recm:1mends the;

crudest forms of gymnastics. It would not deserve to be ncm-

tioned at all if it had not bec=n so Harr::ly reco~::::.-~e:nded for

general use by the most prominent rf:usical al!thori.ties of the

day. How much serious and permanent ::..njury r.:a:;' have been caused

by gymnastics of this kind--without even considc::i:r:3 tl:e cla:n2~3e

suffered by art! Unfortunately this nonsense still flourishes

today (57).

45. The development of strong, bulky muscles is the proper

aim of gymnastics, in sports of all kinds as vlell as in thera-

peutic gymnastics. In both instances the object of practicing

'tvith perserverance has less to do with refinement, gradation

and co-ordination of movements than with increase of so-called

brute strength. Gymnastics can strengthen muscles, said E.

du Bois-Reymond in his famous speech, but cannot make co-

ordinated motions natural. Musicians never cite this important

sentence, although they do cite much of lesser importance from

the same speech.

If strong muscles were necessary for instrumental playin3,

it would follow that the best player would be the one who pos-

sessed athletic arms and hands. On the contrary, o~e often

observes that even players with weak muscles produce powerful

tone. Is it not true that child prodigies often amaze by the

fullness of tone? One starts at exactly the wcong end if he

begins piano study with muscle training. Furthermore) this

Page 73: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

67

training has always been initiated with the training of those

muscles which, in their mechanical proficiency, are most lim­

ited and most specialized--the bending and stretching muscles

in the fingers, which can never do anything other than bend

or stretch. Ceaseless finger exercise is the slo~an. One

runs up against it ever~vhere.

gymnastics whose application is supposed to save a great deal

of time and even to refresh the body. ~.Ji th Hennig2 the fun-

dar!lental conception is the "independence of fingers. 11 'L:e

same applies to Ehrlich. 3 The highest possible stroke is nee-

essary for a good attack. The Tausig-2hrlich "Daily Studies"

are recommended as a complete course of 11 piano gy::n:::'l.astics. 11

Jaell's precepts result in the same torturous finger exercise.

Observe the aggravatingly deformed position of the hands (fig.

28-40, p. 20 ff.). Caland has edited Deppe 1 s prized finger

exercises, thus numbering herself among the representatives

of isolated finger gymnastics, in contrast to her purported

goal of freedom. On pp. 16 and 17 (oo. cit.) she gives pre-

cise instruction for the active, individual exercise of .t=· .... :tn-

gers. vfuen she demands that the path from the brain should

be thoroughly studied--as if that were possible--vJhere is the

difference between her and the other finger technicians? :iovl

one can unite the conceptions of "free fall 11 and 1'playing with

2H . enn~g.

1903. EinfuehrUng in den Beruf des Xlavierlchrers. Leipzig,

3Ehrlich. Wie uebt man Klavier? Berlin, 1897, p. 22

Page 74: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

68

wei0-ht 11 with fino-er exercises still remains unoxpL::incc. One Q 0 ~

asks in vain why Breithaupt, who 'tvas completely on the ri6ht

track towards freedom from finger gymnastics, describes the

most complicated finger motions (p. 27q), divided into five

temporal phases with fingers skippin,s nnd sJ?rinz;i:::-• .s L~!ce little

h I . t . th . . . . . 1 ,.. . . l t ammers. maJ.n aJ.n at J.t J.s J.mpossJ.o_e r.or a pl.&n::Ls:: o

derive any benefit from reading Breithaupt's studies. It is

impossible for him to know what he actually should do and what

he should avoid.

This is certainly sufficient proof to convince possible

doubters that the purely mechanical side of practice has been

the only one stressed. The attempt has been made to fix, and

thereby to exclude and to make ineffective, just those muscles

which in their unlimited power lend the hand great freedom

of motion in space. These muscles are those of the shoulder

and upper arm (51).

46. Connected with the over-estimation of muscle training

is an error which regularly introduces itself when musicians

occupy themselves with physiological questions. Tney are happy

if they can impress their comrades with detailed enumeration

of all muscles, even using Latin, anatomical nomenclature.

The individually named muscles are anatomical, but not physio­

logical units. 4 They resemble, in form, unified and limited

masses, it is true, but their function is not dependent on

4R. du Bo~s-R1 eymond ( it 245) • QE· £__•, p. •

Page 75: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

69

this arrangement. As needed, a larger bundle of fibers is

selected from this muscle, a smaller from the other. This

is especially true of the shoulder and upper-arm muscles, and

less so the nearer we come to the fingers. Science has already

distinguished between form and function. Useless cnum2r.:-:::ion

of muscles in this way can be found in Stoe-::·:c:, Cl::.::-k., C:::.lancl,

von der Hoya and others, as well as in Jael: 1 s illustrations.

There are still many gaps in the knowledge of muscular partici-

pation in a specific motion, 'b...1t vle have fortunc:tely cor:12 mvay

from the fixed-pattern approach, outmoded in many respects,

'tvhich sterns from Duchenne. 5 In a 't·my v-Ihich for its tim::: \vas

exemplary and astonishingly accurate, Duchenne described the

effect of each individual muscle as an anatomical unit on the

basis of localized electrical stimulation. The error in the

method lies in the arbitrary excitation by the investigator,

whereas, in an actual movement, the organism makes a far dif-

ferent and much more comprehensive use of the musculature.

It is mandatory that this convenient fixed-pattern approach,

confusing in its consequences, be discarded; as yet it has r:.

not been superseded, even in scientific circles. Caland 0

turns the principles of practice upside down, to the benefit

of her idea of inner muscular tension. ~~ereas common motions

become ever more unconscious, more automatic, she maintains

5Duchenne trans. by

6Caland.

de B<;mlogne. Die P~iolog~ dE;_t: BeHegungen. Wern~cke. Kassei and-Leipz~g, 1885.

"Klavierlehrer," 1904, p. 272.

German

Page 76: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

70

that it 11 is our duty to establish 'tvhich muscles we ought to

learn to use consciously, in order that the oti1cr muscles,

which work together with these natu::.ally, prodacc the intended

motion."

I maintain this to be a diiettD.ntish misconcept::..on which

would not have arisen at all with mature consideration, for

the anatomical designation of muscle groups often has very

little to do v;rith the kno-v;rledge of their function. This

designation is largely antiquated, wron~ and confusing. ~2

do not even know which muscle groups participate in a motion,

and, if vle did, we would never learn to execute a motion better

or more securely on that account. Fortunately, consciousness

of these procedures is vlithheld from us, ancl therefore we are

relieved of the responsibility of always applying the right

muscles. The body thus maintai-ns its straight-forward freedom

and naivete, and the teacher, as well as the student, is spared

the burden of remembering useless rubbish.

47. The attempt to make hand and fingers "more supple" can

be cited as a further error. Suppleness is neither a techni­

cally correct nor a clear and unequivocal concept. By it one

can just as 'tvell mean an unusual expansion or range of move-

ment in the joint as a certain increase of speed in a sequence

of movements. Both aims are pursued.

In order to enlarge the compass of the joints, one

the attempt to expand, to over-stretch and to bend t~-"em

makes

Page 77: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

71

of shape. The great Jackson values a notched stick, a stretch­

ing board, for passive spreading of the fingers and attempts

to extend the metacarpal joint forcibly by means of cylinders

of varying diameters. Many still pursue this end in the same

or similar way. The so..;called "rubber r..en, 11 ~·:hose nc-,turc:.lly

inhibiting joint surfaces have been completely c:~ ';a:cd cy

premature expansion during childhood, are those who are supple

in the real sense of the word. It is, hm~7ever, just in these

inhibiting surfaces, in the limitations on the moveilicnt of

the joint, that the great perfection of the joint's activity

lies. It is well known what a disadvantage for violinists and

pianists overly flexible fingers can be, and Hhat a loss of

power they can cause. Such fingers are improperly considered

good "piano fingers" because of the "loose'' joints. This sort

of flexibility, which almost approaches a kind of 11 jointless­

ness," cannot possibly be a technically desirable goal. In

actual fact technique demands something quite different. It

focuses attention not on the joints themselves, but rather

on the muscles, because they either make the joint firm or

relax it.

It is a false conception that joints must first be made

"flexible" by use of a greater or lesser degree of force.

Every healthy joint is freely movable and loose and has its

natural compass. Certainly there are innumerable individual

differences. Also some hands have a more favorable const~~ction

Page 78: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

72

and form than others; it is chiefly a question of the very

important span or "spread." Unfortunately, the tc;::-:?tation

to give an unfavorably built hand a greater exoansive breadth

by passive stretching and over-extension of fingers is very

great. All such efforts must be discarded, however, for they

only lead to injury and stiffening of che joints. ~1echanical

exercises are only permissible in so far as they are limited

to the expansive power in the muscles of hands and fingers

themselves, without exterior force. The fundamental rule that

with normal hands technique can be improved exclusively by

natural, normal practice on the instrument itself--only this

fundamental rule has a physiological and psychological basis

(57).

48. Obviously a confusion of the function of muscles with

that of joints lies at the bottom of the popular term '' flexi­

bility." There is a failure to realize that it is the muscles

which fix and brace the joint or release it, relaxed and free,

to its own weight or to other forces. For example~ "C:Jhcn I

hold my hand stiff during piano attack by contracti~g the mus­

cles placed around the wrist, no change has occurred thereby

in the joint itself. The bones are only fixed in & certain

position. Thus it is not correct to speak of playing with

a "flexible" hand or a stiff wrist. However, one hears the

like thoughtlessly uttered every day. On the other hand, if

I wish to relax the wrist while playing, ~~t do not succeed

Page 79: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

73

in doing so immediately, I have used wrong muscular action,

contrary to my purpose. Stretching and bending of the poor

wrist is of no use. The error resides in the brain. It is

there that the cooperation of the many participatins muscles

is not yet familiar enough. An example: if I ball my hund

into a fist, the wrist is involuntarily made rigid. Bending

is clearly limited in comparison to the bending capacity 'tvhcn

the fingers are outstretched. For example, I would intention­

ally hold the wrist completely rigid if I -vmnted to execute

a powerful bloT.v with my fist. As pointed out before (36),

it is just this relationship between hand and finger muscles

which demonstrates so clearly hmv different muscular sroups

support each other for a co~~on task, group themselves tosether

and adapt momentarily to any purpose. The flexo::::- and extensor

muscles in the fingers, coming from the underarm and distributed

over all the joints in the hands, would not be able to accom­

plish any task with certainty if the shorter hand muscles sur­

rounding the wrist and affecting it did not lend this joint

the necessary stability or resistance. The continually demand­

ed "looseness" of the wrist is simply not compatible with this.

Looseness can be expected only in a condition of relaxation

but never in the moment of attack (83). The degree of resis­

tance which may be temporarily unnecessary and which is always

changing, must be learned in the most finely shaded gradations.

The technical difficulty is thus in giving in and letting go

Page 80: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

74

at the right point. The beginner is prone to stiffen all joints

by unnecessary muscular effort. Doing away vlith excessiv-2

muscular action is what the process of "making the joint flex­

ible" really is. This is, however, a purely psychic procedure.

Compare this to what has been said above in regard to the elimi­

nation of accompanying motions (38).

49. Suppleness is not used merely in the sense of spatially

extensive flexibility, but also in the sense of temporally

rapid flexibility. To be supple is to be able to repeat the

same motion in especially rapid succession and to be able to

perform different motions which follow one another rapidly.

Naturally, the increase in this sort of suppleness as well

was always sought through practice--however, without success

and only with delusion about its possibility.

Probably 0. Raif was the first to demonstrate that rapidity

of a succession of movements cannot be increased, no matter

how many times it is repeated. In actual fact, we have no

physiological basis for assuming that movements ought to fol­

low each other more rapidly through repetition. According

to S. Meyer, the only possible explanation for the increase

in speed through practice is the time saved by avoidance of

wasted effort caused at first by sympathetic motions contrary

to the purpose. Anything which can be achieved in the T..vay

of increased speed is achieved by lessening the initial wasted

effort caused by disturbing accompanying motions which interfere

Page 81: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

at some point with the purpose (38). Through Dractice ~

greater speed can be achieved beyon<! !!. .§.E_ecific, innate

75

degree, which varies significantly wi~l} the indiyidual. .{aif' s

observation that educated persons have, in gener.:J.l, more dex­

terity than those of lower station is interesting. Ho-v;ever,

pianists are not in any way more dexterous than non-?~2nists.

Among the latter several were easily able to produce seven

attacks per second with the same finger, while a good nu~ber

of fine pianists were only able to produce five. The absolute

maximum is twelve separate motions per second. This limit

corresponds tot~ limit beyond which the ear is no longer

able to distinguish individual tones clearly. \·Je possess,

however, even leaving out rotation, sufficient finger speed

to meet all artistic demands. A hand whose individual fingers

are only able to produce four attacks per second already has

at its command more motions than the tones we can distinguish

in the same time span (5 x 4 equals 20). Jaell's investiga­

tions with the d' Arsonval chronometer agree with Raif's con­

clusions in the most important point: experienced pianists

are in no way able to execute more rapid motions than inex­

perienced ones--rather, the reverse can happen. From this,

however, Jaell fails to draw the right physiological conclu­

sions. She attempts, rather, to increase the rapidity of at­

tack of each individual finger on its own by special methods,

chiefly with the help of increased muscular tension. On p. 2

Page 82: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

76

the following is said verbatim, "The inability to execute the

motion of attack quickly and energetically is the conseouence ~

of complete muscular slackness." This lack of tension is said

to be remedied only if each moving organ has a non-movin3 one

as a point of support. Consequently muscular tension is to

be required from the fingers to the back. Thus exactly the

opposite of natural passivity, of mechanically necessary re­

laxation--evarywhere intentional, active interference and there­

fore a barrier to any free exploitation of weight and inertia,

the true fundamental factors of all movement. One can see,

in a new £orm, the old antithesis between natural movement

and arbitrarily conceived and laboriously trained "artistic

movement."

50. Unfortunately, holding the upper ~ stiff and, in some

forms of attack, also the low~ arm and han2, is even today

a rather generally widespread error, in spite of the fact that

a more reasonable vie~ has occasionally gained ground. Appar­

ently, this error can be traced back to a whole chain of er-

roneous conceptions which have to be tested one after the

other.

First of all, the starting point has always been the idea

(which, with a certain superficiality of observation, would

be quite easy to conceive) that the fingers, on the one hand,

could be thoroughly trained only if they were individually

drilled, isolated from each other and made independent. On

Page 83: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

77

the other hand, the fingers could not b8 drilled at all unless

they were further isolated and made independent from the up­

per members, hand and arm; thus one could eliminate the hiE.;;hly

disadvantageous influence of the latter. Consequently the

point was reached where: 1) each finger ~vas practiced :..ndi­

vidually; and 2) all the upper parts of the arm T~lere fixed.

What was already said above (45) is conclusive in point-

ing out the worthless character of individual finger exercise.

The final consequence of conceiving all technique as gym­

mastics is that just those muscles are sought out for in­

cessant drill that can only execute the motions of bending

or stretching the fingers.

However, we have already seen that the expectation of

achieving greater rapidity in a succession of motions by the

same finger must come to naught (49).

~~at remains as the achievement of these efforts is the

increase in thickness and strength of the flexor and extensor

muscles. Certain~y, the pianist's forearm becomes more muscu­

lar, but this should not lead him to believe that this rela­

tively slight increase, distributed over each of the approxi­

mately two dozen forearm muscles, has brought him to his high

level of technical skill. Entirely different influences are

responsible.for that.

It seems to be generally accepted--in view of the reign­

ing confusion nothing can be maintained with certainty in these

Page 84: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

78

questions--that unpracticed fingers disturb and obstruct each

other, whereas isolated drill of individual fingers makes them

independent of each other. This is actually not true, because,

with the exception of the fourth finger, each has its owa sep­

arate tendon. In addition, each finger has an isolated nerve

system for the flexors and extensors up to the brain center.

Thus anatomical isolation of each finger extends up to the

highest initial stage of the motive mechanism. vT.'Iat alone

can be achieved by practice and what at the same time fostered

the illusion of making the fingers independent is the learning

of the temporal succession of finger motions, 'tvhich must be

precisely adapted to each musical figure in speed and rhythm.

This learning is intellectual and has nothing to do with the

degree of finger muscle development. The fact that frequent

use of muscles eventually affects them, makes them larger and

better nourished, is secondary for technique and has a profit­

able effect only f9r the economy of the body.

We will examine the worth of individual finger exercise

critically once again in the matter of equalization (56).

51. In order to make the fingers independent of the hand and

arm, and thus to submit them intensively and without inter­

ference to isolated exercise, it was believed that the whole

arm, including the hand up to the metacarpal joint, the knuckles,

must be fixed. Thus all the well-known, infuriating fixations

from hand to back were adopted--for example, the fixation of

Page 85: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

79

the upper arm by means of a book held fast betHeen it and the

ribs, etc. In musical circles still worse procedures were

talked about--tethering of the upper arm and even of the hand.

The "loose" wrist, unavoidable in some forms of attack, v7as

the first interruption in the system of fixation, already a

big step forward. In so far as one is ready to grant f::ecdom

to the forearm, he is decidedly progressing. 1--Io\vever, there

is still much to be done in the step-by-step battle to free

the body from all sorts of fixations--again, higher up to the

shoulder muscles, etc. Truth and falsehood are often fo'..lnd

directly side by side. Plaidy7 says the elbow must stand free

of the body, and then demands exercises with a stationary ru1d

confined hand. In staccato exercises with hand motion, so

rules H. Riemann, 8 the arm should not participate at all in

the beginning, but may take part in the motion later. As if

this could be so simply decreed and settled without paying

any attention to mechanical laws! Even Calandg demands that

the elbow should be held as close to the body as possible in

the "free controlled fall." .How gravity can then be of any

effect in the "fall" is inexplicable. It is this sa::~e con­

fusion which pervades her whole fixation system. Caland ar­

rived finally at fixation up to the shoulder. With its active

7Plaidy, Der ~laY-ierlehrer. Leipzig, 1874.

82£. £it., p. 10.

9££. cit., p. 25.

Page 86: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

80

lowering of the shoulder, this fixation produces, seen from

a physiological standpoint, nothing but a rather intense feel­

ing of tension in the muscles which pull the shoulder blades

down. This tension deceives one into feeling a lesscni~g of

the subjective weight of arm and hand. Actually, in lo'\·Jc:rin[;

the arm toward the key with this tension, the power of the

arm cannot be objectively altered. Tension through arbitrary

lowering or fixing of the shoulder can accomplish absolutely

nothing mechanically for the motion of attack; at best, it

only interferes with and works against it. How "free fall 1'

is supposed to be reconciled to this tension and lowc::ring of

the arm on to the key, obviously a slow and very activ2, in­

hibited motion, remains a puzzle. Carrying the arm is a high~

ly active motion, in which the actual transfer of muscular

power from the shoulder onto the key becomes possible only

when carrying ceases. In any case, shoulder fixation and ex­

treme pronation are closely connected. Because it is so un­

natural, it is understandable why the typical Deppe pronated

position is so tiring. How useless this stiffness and waste

of strength is: to bring the forearm into a pronated position

with the express intention of causing the most extreme fixa­

tion, juxtaposing elbow and radius. It is already enough of

a disadvantage that considerable pronation is necessary because

of the horizontal position of the keyboard. But why fixation

in this position? A high artistic principle is supposed to

Page 87: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

81

be at the bottom of this continual return of the hand to the

Deppe position. If that were correct, then the nature of our

organism and art must be antipodes.

What Jaell calls "static activity" indicates about the

same thing as Caland's "inner fixation." The lowering of the

hand, says Jaell, should occur as if the hand were held back

by a counterweight above. The counterweight is supposed to

remove a certain part of the weight from the hand. Compare

this W-ith Caland. 10 Th h 1 if · · 1 · • e w o e arm, as ~n a s~ng c p~ece,

is firmly tensed to the fingertips. The power of the back

is used for the attack--in the end, both writers come close

together in writing about the action of the back muscles.

Jaell also describes lowering the shoulder and bringing the

shoulder blades nearer to the middle of the back--in a footnote

Caland warns expressly against the idea that stiff immobility

is meant by controlled tension. Then she ought not to cite

as signs of tension "as in a single piece," "steady, unchang-

ing muscle," "jointless lever," and so forth. She ought to

say in addition when relaxation has to occur, when i~ is r~ally

necessa~. That the condition should always be capable of a

momentary, "elastic" relaxation proves that a lasting condition

is meant, whereas in reality it is completely the opposite--

a matter of momentary tension and continuous relaxation. t,Jhat

Caland perhaps sees distantly is the swinging motion, for in

lOcaland. Technische Ratschl~eg~, pp. 7 and 10.

Page 88: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

82

this her ideas would be much more appropriate.

It seems to me that the whole attempt to fix the limbs

can be traced back chiefly to the fact that no one has ob­

served or even seen the manifold, fine arm movements with

his eyes open and without prejudice. Certainly no anatomical

knowledge of joint construction is necessary to observe joint

flexibility--for example, at the elbow, that the forearm can

bend and extend ·in only one direction (plane) in relation to

the upper arm, disregarding rotation. Another example: are

lateral motions of the hand over a distance of five or six

keys possible without turning the upper arm on its longitudi­

nal axis, that is, without participation of the shoulder joint?

Has no one noticed how clearly the forearm shar~ in the motion

when even one finger is alternately bent and extended, indeed

that it is physically impossible to hold the forearm really

still? There are countless similar examples.

Any energy expended on preventing this mechanical neces­

sity is, at the least, useless and such expenditure is hardly

ever negligible. It is an unfortunate cause-and-effect rela­

tionship, lying in the nature of things, that each bending

or extension of a finger produces a certain fixation which

extends not merely to the next higher joint, but still higher

up, counteracting the free movement of the whole arm mass.

Fixation is necessarily increased when the work of the finger

is limited to a narrowly restricted area, for example, to one

Page 89: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

83

key. The result is a vicious circle.

Any player who has seriously tried to carry through ex­

treme fixation of any limb whatever comes to the same conclu­

sion. At first he is driven to ever greater expenditure of

energy through the mechanical impossibility of fixation and

finally, when a certain degree of muscular tension is reached,

he is able to do nothing. It is impossible to hold perfectly

still. The whole arm goes along, even when one exerts himself

to the utmost to fix some part of it. Merely leaning back in

a chair inhibits free mobility. Attempts at fixation become

the more useless and objectionable the closer they are to the

free end of the extremities and the greater the force that is

applied.

For the pianist, the first firm point is afforded in the

support of the pelvis by the seat. From the fingertips to

this point every joint is flexible. Our organism has a com­

plete and unsurpassable arrangement, obeying of its own accord

the mechnical conditions in the whole joint construction. It

adapts itself so exactly to every kind of motion that we can

improve nothing, only make things worse by artificial aids.

The best and most purposeful arrangement of our body consists

in this: that it allows fixation to occur only as far as it

is necessary and just at the place where it is necessary to

realize the purpose of the specific ·motion as completely as

possible. If natural movement is so understood--and all truly

Page 90: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

84

artistic motion is natural movement--then it is obvious that

all motions which willfully oppose the body in any way are

all £Q£ intentional and are not true artistic motions at all;

they are, instead, artificial and unnatural. The Jaell-Caland

back-arm fixation can be included among them. Its worth is

seen thus in the right light. Truly artistic technical motions

are native, intuitive and "unintentional." The expression

"artistic motion" is misleading and should not be used at all.

52. It is an old established law of mechanics that all limbs

up to the remote point of support take part in even the small­

est motion. Even a simple geometrical observation, as I em­

ployed for the bowing of string instruments,ll proves the nec­

essary participation of all limbs, in so far as they are movable.

The same holds true, of course, for the motion of attack. Every

member, from the nail joint on, is suspended at a point movable

in space, and the whole upper extremity hangs, as it were, in

the shoulder-chest joint. From this point down all bones are

surrounded only by yielding parts; none are fixed. Here every­

thing is movable; the slightest spatial displacement immediately

changes the center of gravity and the distribution of mass in

the entire system. All the parts must follow along in this

displacement. Each finger attack produces a ricocheting action

in the upper joints, first of all in the wrist. It is the more

11Die Physiologie der Bogenfuehrung auf den Streichinstrumenten. Leipzig, 1907, Breitkopf und Haertel-,---znd edition. -

Page 91: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

85

easily seen and felt the shorter and more powerful the finser

motion.

There should be no objection that this is construed on

a purely theoretical basis, that the participation of the

upper limbs is so slight as to be practically meaningless.

Here it really so slight, then flexibility ought at least -;:-;ot

be affected, and the body would not be hindered in the free­

dom and delicacy of its natural arrangement by intentional

opposition. Moreover, these motions are in no way negligible.

One needs only once to learn to see them and be filled \vith

wonder that he ever overlooked them before. One can actually

feel these motions in himself up to the point described on

the collar bone. The displacement of the collar bone can be

felt through the skin with every strong finger stroke, even

more, of course, with every wrist motion. One should not be

surprised that we are consistent in emphasizing even the

smallest finger motion. It is not a question of the absolute

extent of participation in the nearest joints but rather that

such participation is invariably present. wbether small or

great is in itself a matter of indifference. It is the im­

mutability of natural law that must be respected.

53. This participation is not a mere mechanical necessity

caused by shifting of the center of gravity and a ricocheting

action. From it our organism achieves the highest purposeful­

ness in that it allows the muscles of the shoulder ~~d of the

Page 92: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

86

vJhole arm to assist in a precisely adapted way \·lith the motion

of even a finger joint. The physiological law mentioned be-

fore holds true here. All muscles--even though unconsciously

to us--assist if they at all to the

motion in question--unconscious and precisely a~~~ted muscular

activity upward from the torso and t~e fulc~u~ formed by the

pelvis, this with the bending of even a finger joint. This is

not altered by the fact that vJe are unconscious of these mo-

tions. One who is dubious about this in regard to a finger

joint should convince hir:~self by the exact wethod given belo\v

(82). To a certain extent the effect of a muscle over several

skeletal parts is comp~ehensible if one considers that most nus-

cles run over tv.;o, three or even more joints. There are, then,

at least three skeletal parts on Khich one muscle has a direct

effect. Indeed, according to 0. Fischer's brilliant discovery,

muscles affect joints over which they are not even strung.

This gives some approximate indication of how infinitely

many variations the contrary and alternating actions of

countless muscles are capable. Since in muscular motion we

feel only the stronger contraction accompanied by clearly

changed tension, and not the weaker, it is understandable

that no clear conception of the extent of muscle participa-

tion can be made on one•s own body. A detour by way of sci­

entific experiment must be made.

54. In any powerful motion, participation of the shoulder

muscles is necessa~J in order to exploit the power of these

Page 93: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

87

large muscles. It ;;.;rould contrad:.ct ti.1e physiological la~v of

conservation of nmver if one tried '

to produce with one or a

few weak and thin muscles the s<:::-:e large

muscles produce 'l.vith only a fractio:-: of their stre::ngth.

Applied to the particular case of piano tec~nique: it

with ~he most extreme exertion of \veal~ fin~e~ ~~c:~~les ~he

co-operation ~f th~

through a sHinging motion of :~h~ \·7hole limb E":l.~.ss.

It goes without saying that the vJOrk output increases

in proportion to the size of the physical mass of the portion

of the arm set in motion. The closer we come to the free

end of the extremity, the less is the mass set in motion

(63). Therefore, the little muscle \•lhich bends the finger

in the attack must replace the deficiency in work output

which the small moving mass affords with all the greater

contractive force. Furthermore the fact is decisive that

the larger the total of co-operating muscles, the later

comes the moment of exhaustion, of the using up of energy

resources, since it is distributed over many muscles. A

single muscle group becomes exhausted quickly. Isolated

movement is tiring in a very short time.

It is easy to remonstrate that the large shoulder rnus-

cles cannot equal the refinement of finger motion. This is

an error. The broad shoulder muscles attached to the upper

Page 94: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

88

arm make it possible to move this Dart of the skeleton Hith

extraordinary precision in any direction and \·lith any desired

force. This is due to the delicate capacity of adjustment of

the ball end of the upper arm in the shoulder socket. The

remonstrance above overlooks the fact that the movGments \vhich

our hands make in all directions round about in space, fine

and exact motions, come precisely from this shoulder joint.

Finger movements are only apparently more delicate and exact,

even if of lesser extent. In general, hmvever, they have en-

tirely different and more limited tasks. They are grasping

and clasping organs. The are disposed like

hooks and pincers and thereby s:1.m1 their natural purpose \..rith-

out ambiguity. They are not naturally created for and suited

to pi :ro technique. T::.ey must forego their original character

and become "pushing organs," spokes in a wheel and so forth.

Most important, there should be no hesitation in accepting the

fact that motion is acco;:nplished "t..rith the wh9le arm from the

shoulder joint. In order to convince oneself of the delicate

action in the upper arm, fasten a pencil on the elbow and ob-

serve how precisely and delicately writing and drm..ring can be

accomplished. All large-scale motions in dravnng, \-Jriting, etc.

are made involuntarily "from the shoulder." The finger joints

play a natural, relatively subordinated role in this, inasmuch

as they are used only to grasp and hold the drawing instrument.

55. 1be important objections to the kind of attack invaria-

bly practiced up to now lie in the function of arm joints and

Page 95: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

89

muscles. This attack, comprised of mere finzer ~otion, can

be characterized as a 11 technique of little ha:"'.1r:lc:rs. u ------ This

hammer technique, completely cen~ered in ~~uckle exercise,

reaches the high point of mechanization in Zuscnneid's de-

i t • II .....,h • • ~ ,- t' r • 1.., l , ' . d scr p ~on. 1 e root jo~n.:s o£ ne r::..ngers suou~a oe: v:::..m1e

as a hinge (anatomically wrong!). A rigidly high finger po-

sition in the manner of a cocked bolt precedes the finger

attack, followed by a lightning-quick descent, 11 etc.

The most questionable extreme of "pose" is the finger

position, in 'tvhich the root joint is pulled back from the

hand, the other finger joints are curved and everything is

made rigid. It is thus a sort of claH hand. Quite similar

and almost as misshapen hand positions occur in Dree, Unschuld

von !~elasfeld and, above all, in Jacll.

like position of fingers 11 is 't·Jhat \!erkenthin

26-.39) 11 A clmv-

(0 -~ j. ~

_£:Lt., p. 61)

flatly demands. ~veak tone, a tinkly, choppy kind of perform-

ance--these are the general musical cha~acteristics produced.

Physiologically, the 'tvorst side is not merely that the flexor

muscles must exert themselves to the maximum in forte and

therefore tire and fail much too soon, but that the extensor

muscles, by nature much weaker, are endangered to a much

greater extent. They have an inordinately tiring task to

perform, considering their diameter, because, in harrmcr tech-

nique the height of fall must be first attained by the exten-

sors. For eve---v attack is preceded by the highest possible

elevation of the fingers in order to give the flexors the

Page 96: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

90

'tvidest possible arc. In this r.,,ray a completely distorted fin­

ger and hand position comes about. This is the reason Hhy

pianists complain about pains fror:1 over-exertion or over­

training--pains so often located in the back of the hand or

the extensor side of the forearm. H2 have a natur.::::.. pro­

tection against nerve and muscle injuries ~rr the character­

istic pain which accompanies exhaustion. Ho~;v often, though,

this regulatory warning goes unheeded, indeed is vie-v;red as

an irritating obstacle to be overcome.

56. 'l..11ere is no doubt that the peculiarity of the piano

with the unvarying uniformity of its keyboard mechanism is

just what has invited and fostered the hammer variety of play­

ing. Every finger is supposeG to become an attacking hammer.

This endeavor has led to the \'.7vrst error that has ever crept

into piano practice, that of making the fingers the same, so­

called equalization, of systematic leveling-out of the dif­

ferences of strength in the fingers.

According to Germer--to cite one from the rna~ examples

in the literature--the thumb and fingers are to be so equal­

ized that they produce uniform effects in playing. The middle

finger as the strongest should serve as the norm. Besides

finger technique he recognizes the falling weight of hand and

forearm as potential striking por..·;rer. There is no mention of

upper-arm motion. Of the new authors Deppe, too, still has

certain notions of equalization. According to the note on

p. 2 (Xlose, Q£. ~ht.) the hand position is determine~ with

Page 97: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

91

consideration for the two weakest fingers (fourth and fifth).

that is clear. How is this equal amount of pov1er, ho~vever,

' to be reconciled with the unequc.l r~2lat:_o::ships of mass ana

weight in the fingers, if free 11 :0:s.ll'' ::..s rc.:c.lly the foe.mda-

tion of Deppe 1 s teaching? The c-:::cdit of f~.rst: ocposing the

idea of equalization doubtless belongs to 0. :lai:f, .,dho estab-

lished through his extensive experiments that the flexibility

of the individual finger remains unchanged in suite of all

exercise. The regulated distribution of weieht to the indi-

vidual fingers was the result of studies by Bandmann. Third­

ly, Breithaupt should be mentioned. In making use of this

idea he gave an excellent prese::1tation of the rolling of

weight from one finger to the other. Only the last link in

the chain is missing: the swinging, rotating motion of the

forearm, which puts an end at last to all isolated finger work.

It certainly requires no anatomical knowledge to see

through these aberrations. It is obvious that the fingers

are differently formed by nature. They are unequally long and

thick and unequally provided -v;ith muscles and tendons. ~·Lost

importantly, they are different in mass. Despite the special

musculature in the ball of the little finger and its independ­

ent mobility, it will never, never reach the strength of the

second or third finger, regardless of the most strenuous la­

bors. The fourth finger is bound by tendons on the bac!c of

the hand to the extensors of the third and fifth. It is at

Page 98: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

92

such a disadvantage thereby, that it can never attain the

stretching ability of its neighbors. Fortunately the foolish

period \vhen the tendon connection was allowed to be severed

surgically is a thing of the past. Of course, gymnastics has

always promised to be able through its O\vn methods to make

the fourth finger as strong as the others. There has, how­

ever, g~~E been a handl2 which has come anywhere close to

being really equalized. In spite of this many pianists claim

to have achieved this goal. The grounds for this claim, how-

ever, lie elsewhere. The real bases for this achievement are

the ability to distribute arm \veight equally on any finger at

will and the anatomically equivalent position of fingers in

the forearm rotation movement (75, 83).

57. Replace-;nent of intellectual ~·.10rk has become the mark of

the technique which no-v1 has assumed an independent position

in its o~~ right. The practical applications and the conse-

quences of this nonsense, however remarkable some of them are,

can no longer surprise. It is still thought today that the

aid of more or less clumsy apparatus cannot be dispensed ~·Jith

in developing musical technique. It would be interesting, al­

though too digressive here, to collect·all the little g~~nastic

12rt is very interesting to picture the hands of great key­board artists (as Jaell does, for example) as a curiosity, but of no value for piano technique. To attempt to read some­thing characteristic of its possessor from his hand is to look for the nature of an artist in the v7rong place, in what are merely his tools. It leads back to a kind of chiromancy and does not bring us a step fon.;ard.

Page 99: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

93

helps and methods recc:-:::1~2ncled in coun~J..css boo:cs ~nd school

texts. The mention of individual aids o£ this type has v&lue

for the purpose of the present work only insofar as it makes

clear how backward we still are in uncierst&~di~s t~e clcmc~~s

of psycho-physiolo~y. ~fucn Cal~nd rc;ports of Deppe that nc

suggested the use of a rub:::er ball for pr&ct~cc purposes

order to arouse consciousness in the fingertips, it shows a

complete confusion of fundamental concepts. The use of a pen-

cil of specified length for silent practice o~ t:-:c octave , . GlS-

tance (Breithaupt) is on the same level. .. ,- .. - ~

~r 2&nloulatLons

of this sort do not produce direct injury, they are certainly

of no use and lead rather to round-about methods and m·Jay from

the simple, direct pa'ch. Liszt designated the Kal1(.brcnner

gy.ide-:m"!.~"!:. ironically as 11 guide-ane. alJ There has been no

lack of other voices raised a~ainst mechanical aids. Knorr14

t, t h . . d d c . . . . ' . d . d says na and guL es an ~Lng2r exercLse~s snouia De Lscar -

ed. \.Jhere the player lacks the innate strength to play in aca-

demically correct fashion, enforced artificial aids c&~not pro-

vide it. One almost always finds a chapter in the teaching

methods in which artificial technical aids are valued as im-

portant and their help is considered indispensible. At the

13 ,. 'J . t . .... 2'~'? (''G . ' . II • d' c:r. veL zmanr:., 9P.· ~2.~., p. 7~. ' ·uJ..ae-maLn J..n J...cates a hand guide used for acquiring feeling for interval Gis­tances. 11 Guide-8.ne 11 means literally a t'guide for asses 11 or, idiomatically, the sort of ruled paner used in training students to write. The translator.)

l4l~'1.orr, Hethod. Lei::::2,c;.e:1 f:L1e-;: :c.av~:.e:::-le:·y;:e. Leipzig, 1850, p. 10.

Page 100: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

same tir.:1e warnino is usually ,:;:> :\o

~·Jriter gives the lil:1i ts of their usc allo~·Jable 'LTi thout injury,

seem necessnry.

than to have such ~alf-hc2rted a~vice.

training by means of relatively great

• • fo t t l • b f .... . , Jo~n~ s re cn~ns y means o ou~s~ce,

All such H technical c.icis, 11 ev2n. the apna:::::::r:-:.:

0 .1""'8 ~·:..,o·u 1 d 'b"' CO"~nle"'"r.' y t-hi""O'.,...... 0'' ,_ "'r-·'- ~ ~- ~-, 1y l'-' :::::).;,4 J...l. "- .. ~.1 ·L·-L -~.."- ...,.,.l.i. L-0."-!- J..I...._J ..... • t • ....:..,;..,(..::..~.-·

out si::mltaneous cultive:.t::..on of the ear ~c::d r.:usical sense, that

is to say, vlithQ.l:!.l:. m~si~, necessarily descends to c:.-ude and

meaningless gym:::1astics. .. big step back to nature would be

taken with the eliminatio-,1 of all such aids. l-Imvever surprising

it may seem to some professional ~xsicians, one of the most

questionable and misleading technical aids is the so-called

dumb piano, the silent keyboard (Virsil piano, etc.). The

idea of separating technique from Tousie appears here in its

most absurd form. ~fnat remains is the empty shell of a piano,

a key mechariisrn without life for the ear and spirit. It is

completely incomprehensible hm·7 musicians Hho claim to b~::: .s2n-

sitive artists are capable of such confusion of ends and means.

One finds condemnation of the du~b piano enunciated ~2~e

there i11. the literature, but Hhat importance have t~-:.2se :C·2·v1

Page 101: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

95

voices in view of

The dumb piano is quite oddly recoz~2~dcd by

on the grounds that its use separates t~c ~~s1ca1 2rc~ t~e

technical. In that the player is ~ot i~r~~2tcd (!)

In opposition, it must be ernnhasizcd without '

q11<1li ::::_ c& -~ion

that the source of eve17thing unr.atural and, ,.. t 1 - • rurc:n.er., o: 1.!1-

.;urious J ) one-sided, over-exertion lies precisely in ··- "- :: l. ~:

sc1)ar<:.t io~1.

It produces an irrit&ti~3 ~olse.

music. It is ohysiolo~icall•y wrc~2 ~o ~tte~nt to .. .__., ....:.;~ ~ lc~1.:::1 l2 .?a to -------'i.·.7ith the help of noises instead o::: :r~u.sicc.l sound.

focuses on noise ot:ren·Jise tl1ar1 it clocs on n·~:;.sicc1l scur;.C1s ar:.d

ClS

him back from usin3 such unr:lusic::l tools even in c .. ~c:..~;;c:ncic;s.

The tool is all too cleverly refi.::-.e:d.

can be controlled purely mechanically t:o a certc:dn extent oy

the clicks which occur on the dm·mstroke as \·lell as u;:on the

release of the key.

will. These "advantages•• have helped to encoura.ze 'i.vide: u32

Page 102: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

96

of the Virgil-technique: pi2no. It s~ould at least be: 80ntioncd

here that Bie values the dumb pla~o as a ~atural n~o=rcssion ., r

from Czerny's teaching.~~

53. Fundamentally it is the sa:·.:2 ;:::::c::, c::.:!..y c.:;_fi:.:::::..-e:nt: in

degree, when one performs mechar-,icc.l ::::inger cxcrci::;cs c.:: the:

music. Artificially the piano beco:·.-:es for t::.-.::; s,Y:__:l

piano. \!Jar must be declared unconditionally o::-1

separated from sound and art. intended by all such

practice? Certainly not the el.::vat:o~ of technical ability

and mechanical dexterity? ~ve "I:Ja::.:t ,,·,-::sic and r:.ot finzer \.vork.

In observing the errors of r:.::;c:c::::-:"1-day tecb1ic;\.:C 1.-Jc find

of technical from spiritual ele?e~ts and the consequent tyr-

anny of what is non-intellectual ar:.cl mc:chc.nicc:l over \·Jhat is

artistic and musical. ?ractice is concerned merely "t·Jith the

mechanical organs of motion, muscl::::s and joints. It cc:m not

lift itself from its deep desc::::nt i~to the mechanic2l up to

the regions of the intellect. The desire to make practicing

more convenient so t~1at there is no rr:ore need for thought is

all too human. \-:':.J.at an aberration is indicated l;•Jhen sore:,;;; com-

pletely .co,_..e.;r-r'l"\ .1.. • .1...o ... ~ intellectual occupation can be undertaken

vJhile practicing and even be recomrnended to students. In

this way "independence" turns into caricature.

16.21?.· .cit., p. 27 5.

Page 103: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

97

The conclusion to be drawn statcscnts of this

r) ?::~ :-.~r:~ :·: ri---·-·--- -- ---- -------------- -·------------- -- ·------·--· ~---- ---------

tion. m•. .Lhl.S rr:otio~ r~u~~t

Page 104: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

SSCTION V

THS MISCONCZPTIO>; 0? FuND.c\i·~::·.<'!:'.'::.:.. ?::: ~'S T .~~_,~.:.;::;~C).L FO~~CZS AI~D. FOl~'{S OF :~,~01,IO~,T IN PL<.;~\7 I:.: u ~c:c;_._<:C.\L SYS'T2~:s

59. The follo\.ving section proposes to exaE1l.r:e critically

some further errors in oiano technioue evident in . . the misconception of the following physiological forces and

motions:

1. elasticity ar.d

2. forces in

3. muscular contraction its durc:.tion

and intensity,

4. forearm rotation as the most important assisting

motion for the attack.

t.Je shall see hmv much confusion and contradictory opin­

ion is involved on all four points. He shall see that, -.;_

sidering the great importance of these factors for all bodily

motion and their misconception and ~vrong application, a natural

motion of attack has not been possible. Here as everyv;here

with previous authors far-advanced conceptions are found rep-

resented side- by-side \vith the most naive views imaginable.

60. Husicians are very inadequately infor·med on t:1e meaning

of elasth'=.:!:.!=..Y as a moving or assisting force in attack. The

demand that the attack should be elastic is often heard.

ever, no one has ever made it quite clear -v;here and how elastic

98

Page 105: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

99

forces occur in the ' . 1 necna::1.sm.-

TI1e false notion ~hat an elastic effect goes fro8 the

key to the attacking fi~:2r has alre~dy bee~ indicated

(16). Another~ no less u~founded ~~2~ ~~s still ~ore follow-

ing: that the exccller:ce; of at t.:.cl( c:2p2::-lG.s o:;. tl~2 nc.lc:s tici ty::

of hand motion, etc., ~,.,,:-:c:e elastic po-v7e:.· is ::-e;::;lly ::::.ctive.

No one has any cle.::.:: conception. Ger:ner spea:zs sev2::..-al tiDes

,. e 1 a ... 1.. c · +- t t' t f t ~"" ' ( ? : ? 7' "r: "" or • s~ 1.~y a ne momen o a -ac~ p. _o, - ,, u~ a

clastic manner of playing (p. 21), of elasticity in the play-

ing mechanism (p. 18). The concep~ of elasticity thus means,

tr~e yielding

of certai~ joints in contrast to their rigid, hard stiffening

through ir:.co:crect use of r:-,uscles. Tl:is false concept::..on of

Germer vJas already rejected by H. ~ZierJarm (2_2. ci~., p. ll),

to be sure, \·Ji thout a r.:.:al underst.:mdins of 1.vhere and hov1

bodily elasticity really takes olace. Comparisons with a

rubber ball or tire 1:·7ould make no sense if one did not assume

an elastic propelling action on the key or on the hand or on

both. It cannot be naintained that these are only images 2nd

similes. Even if this -v;ere the case, such modes of exnression

lThe follmvinz definition of eL:sticity is '?iven bv H. :liemann in his corru-nentary .:md is found ir1 ~Coppe~ s _Pliy_~_:p~, p. 67. 11 A body is fully elastic Hhei.1. it resur,1es its fo::::ncr shape 1:-."ith the same force with \·Jhich it Has cor:r;Jressed or st:;_-etched. Bodies -vlhic h have this characte!.·istic, no matter hmv z:ceat the force or change of fo:_-m, arc not to be found in nature. On the other hand there are no co~pletely inelastic bodies. All bodies have at least the tendency to resu~-:12 i:b:::il~ fo:cc-n.:.:r S1-. e '""1" 1 · · t ~ 1 t.. · ..~ " , --I"'" • .. ~-, ,. ... '! -: .. uap . ne .J..l.lTll S OI e .... c.S l.ClCY are CD_,::;::erenc \'ll.l.i~ Cl.i..l DOQJ...CS. "" t - , , ' ~ - h . . b~ .l.ClUS s eel, ruoocr, v.rua1e cc:1e .ave cor1s :Leer a le s~rJ...n2~::_:1g

pm.;er; lead and clay, ve::.~y little."

Page 106: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

100

would be unclear and confusing in their erroneous fi~u~es of

speech and no less dese1-ving of rejection. Clarity must pre-

vail unquestionably in re~ard to the most i~portant natural

forces involved i:-1 the attack. ~Jhat is not sL:Jpose:d to be

elastic? .Sven the body posture is (:-1. D.ier:~::::::;., .:::~2· :::_~.t., p. 3):

turned neither to·h.,a:.-ds the left nc:.· the riz:.l.t. 11 ::::at is left

over then is "elastic. 11 ~·:hat is r:.2ar:t is obviously nothinz

more th::m mental and phvsical . "'

meaning o~ly in a figu~~t~ve sense.

"'Tl-':.2 hand n1ust be full of life

cit.)--this is a turn of speech as belovsd as ::...::: is !T,eaningless.

A certain, elastic tension is stressed as the best me&ns to

combat sluggish playing. Elastic has the same meaning h:::;re

as active muscular effort. A whol<~ bouquet of rr:eanings for

elasticity can be found in L. Koehler. "Elastic r:::e:ans about

the same as yielding and at the saQe time ready to strike.

It indicates the smooth operation of a mechanism ~~d is cited

as an attribute of steeled finger muscles, of flexible joints,

of the bounce of the hand, etc. 11 11 2lasticity is only possible

in the absence of any cour.::er-pressure. 11 The latter is the

best of the expressions. In the others m2aning

runs confusingly into the actual.

In spite of this, the "elastic attack'' figures in every

text, in all treatments of the sub~ect as a kind .J

. ' . :..no.::..s-pen-

sable academic term. Basically, nothing more is s:~::..d than

Page 107: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

101

that pliability and avoidance of stiffness c.::1cl of the inap-

propriate use of muscles are achieved. Obviously~ the 11 el<J.s-

tic attack 11 owes its origin to an u::1clear idea t:-:r .. t the knm·m

elastic forces active in arm tissues, tendons, ligr:r::ents, joints

and muscles produce a special effect on the key. :~las tic at-

tack is to be taken merely in a figurative, transfc~red sense

wherever it is found. It does not exist as all, understood

in its real sense. It is nothing but self-deception.

tone of ~n elas-

tically taut string beco~es more sonorous as the clastic ten-

sion increases, so~ething elastic, as it were, was heard in

the tone. The tone the a~tribute of elasticity,

and this was boldly transferred via sugges~ion or idca associ-

at ion to the mechanical sound produce::.4 ~ the at tac:z, as a

physical characteristic.

any elastic effect on the key. Lhat elastic pm-:e::s there are

in the arm, hand and finger cannot be v,'lried or applied at

vlill through some chosen forr.~ of movc::;r.1ent. 'ftle are :--:o mo:::-2

able to attack elastically than inelastically. :~ can iG?ute

to no one an inelastic technique~

61. h7hat is the situation, then, tvith respect to t:'1e el&stic

forces in our organism? It is established that the joint

ligaments, the cartilaginous joint covering, the te~dons and

muscles and even the bones are more or less elastic, most of

all the joint cartilage vlhich acts as a sort of 'o1 . .-,::::.s:r agc.:Lnst

Page 108: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

102

pressure and blows. Due to their resilience

protect the joints from excessive stretchins and bending and

permit a certain compensatory lenzt~er.inJ.

Th . ..1- • • , t- t "' "' 4- • • L, e S1~uatLon WLtn respec~ o t~e c~c..s~~c~ty ~oints

muscles is different. ,.... ~

.e.ver-J muscJ..e, r:::v;:::::y

out beyond its point of equilibrium. Zc..ch is :.n c. state of

elastic extension (or tautness), ~·Jhich is still ?::e:s~nt in

a corpse, although significantly greater in a livin:J; organism.

Tendons snap back 'tvhen cut. The red muscle flesh co~~::::s apart.

The potential elastic enexgy of the:! large:: sody of r:.uscle in

a Hhole linb is considerable. C:.ffiOUl'lt--

and this must be firmly held in :-nind--is used exclt:.sively \·lith-

in the musculature itself for the inner economy of its sotions.

All of the muscles located around in the same

condition of elastic tension. They maintain a reciprocal bal-

ance and hold the joint surfaces in continual contact. Should

an active muscle contraction now interfere with the balance

of elastic forces, the perpetual elastic tension pen-i'lits the

advantage that an immediate effect occurs v.7ithout stoos and

starts at the moment of contraction, and with the release of

contra...:::tion the muscle is imillediately drmvn back to its origi-

nal length. Elasticity also has a mechanical purpose in the

operation of single muscles, namely the highly purposeful

arrangement that it counteracts too poHerful a stretching of

th 1 f 1 . 1 . ,.. t . 'h ' • e muse es, as, or examp e, Ln L::: 1.ng a .... ea\lY OOJ<:;ct.

Page 109: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

103

can see from all this that the in~~te cl~stic forces in mus-

cles, tendons, etc. are designed for the sole pur?oae cf

balancing inner forces. From the outside the el~stic activ-

ity can be appraised only in the regularity and prec~sio~ of

movement. It is distributed in the finely calculated pl~y

' of antagonistic and synergistic forces. This is excellently

illustrated, although in crude fo~~n, by the co2parison of

muscular elasticity t'lith the similar elasticity of a compressed

air column found in the air chaE1ber of a >;.;ate:: purc:r. t:erc

there no air chamber, with its elastic ar-1d self-ex.-aandin2; air,

the action of the pt:r:lp handle 'tvould force the water out in

spurts. it, w~tcr co~es out in ~n even flow.

62. ~USCle el~c·L.-~~~~V ig ~ost -... ~~".•.ui·_~P(l, T,·J"_.t~.'•' br_,_·e~_r 1

0U~ e·n.Pr-~·. Co...> .....,o..,;,;.._"' - ,,, _.._.. ~ - - • --

getic contractions for purposes of a far-reaching throw or

arm swing. Even today, science has co:::le no nearer to knowing

tvhat happens in the inner :nuscle structure. He knmv that a

momentary, powerful stretching of a muscle can eve~ lead to

tearing it apart. In any case the S\vineing movemer:.t of mass

in the kinetic sense and high velocity coincide \vith a gr12at

taxing of muscular elasticity. Have the defenders of an 11 elas-

tic attack" the courage to maintain they had any suspicion of

this inner connection?

~<le can go on only if we decide to drop the term, "elastic

attack." If the pedagogue thinks he cannot do without expres-

sions such as suppleness, flexibility, yielding pose, etc.,

Page 110: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

10-4-

then he should at least bear in ~ind that s2v nothin?: ___._ - .....

h . l . ll . , . , 1 , , .... ', . ~· . b t p ys~o og~ca y and p<'1ys~ca.L.y ana. tnaL c~1ey have no L£nns u

a figurative connection \·lith the ::c::-~.:, clc:sticity. In addition,

the remnants

t l d r b d S ... be aba .. : ~--=' (~"",_""-~ ':>--~~ .... ,...,.,,,p._;' s ro <.e an e oun , mu '- nL-on..::u .,;-'--·"'-"", :..-1.. ~.;.;.._ '-•·c~u.· '- •

""h d will h . d h. ~ ,. h ,.. ,_, J': t t' t 1 e rea er ave conv1nce 1mseLI uy now or '-nc ~ac na

any conclusion which is drawn from this sort of false concept

and \·lhich does not keep strictly to scientific fact leads

necessarily to a mistaken method that quickly produces con-

f · S h f 1 · h · · · c· · '" 1 +- • • r us~on. uc, or examp e, 1s t.e ~cent1L1cat1on o= e as~..1C1-Y

and S'tvinging power (4).

It can be established by sir.1ple e:·::perir;-;ent that the::e

is absolutely no outward indication of elastic power. If the

hand is allm...red to fall passively -;,;rith the fingertips striking

the edge of a table it sp::ings back no more than a non-springy

object \vould bounce back if it should fall on the fingertips

extended up\vard.

The conclusion from the v1hole observation is that \ve play

neither elastically nor inelastically, that it makes no sense

to demand an elastic attack that has no real existence except

as a figurative expression. We should learn from this further

that all errors in the attack that we lay at the feet of insuf­

ficient elasticity are to be blamed exclusively on technique

that lacks a physiological basis, on insufficient ~~~tur2l f~eedom

Page 111: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

105

of movement, a..."1d on artificial inh:.. bi tions ar..d fixations.

The frequency Hith ·r .. 1hich elasticity i.n the attack is de-

d d r- • • , - ' t san e o.c JO~nts, musc.~...es, posture, movement--1.n sr;.o:c every-

where and continually--is sufficient proof tl·~."'~t a continuous

war is being waged against unnatur~l, angular, rcstricced

movement, forced upon the player, however, throuzh i~correct

technique. :Because it is not kno\vn where the error lies and

because it is not suspected that the technique itself is in-

correct, no one is able to discover the appro?riate designa-

tion applicable to all the errors. He is then th:-o-:·m back

to using expressions that seem to say much but ' ' . :.":':e:::.n nocn:t.ng,

such as 11 e:lastic 11 and 11 inelastic." It "tvill be concluded by

nmv that where such vague kinds of expressions are used,

there must be hidden a more profound error.

63. Recently the search and quest of professional musicians

h b 1 . 1 1 d ,.. r- • • th as een wor c~ng c ear y totvar a r:orm 0.1.. mot:ton us:tng lle

active, hElayy ~ass of the a~. To be sure, their :nu:,,ber is

small compared to the grec:t number of artists and pecagogues

who wrestle continuously vJith the old school tradition and

who seem to have no desire for anything better. It is surely

not merely a thirst for theoretical knowledge that motivates

the small flock. It is felt more or less clearly that the

traditional methods are not in harmony with natural laws of

motion and that these methods exercise an arbitrarJ and re-

stricting control. Thus it happens that these authors are

Page 112: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

106

united in the common goal of freeing themselves from finger

technique and of bringing into play forces independent of

muscular contraction and greater than those vJhich the flexors

can produce, especially in forte passages. In this effort

the pardonable error is committed of placing conscious weight

playing in direct contrast to the old technique, as if even

a single tone could ever have been played o~ the piano without

weight.

64. The first step towards getting rid of mere muscular action

was the attempt to strike the key with the help of the ''free

fall 11 of the fingers. This finger fall had already been de­

manded by A. Kullak. 2 The finger fall presumes a previous

finger lift and thus provides no opportunity to get rid of

the old finger technique. The fall of ha11d and forearm could

mean progress, but only the swing of the whole arm could lead

to full realization of the goal. Deppe and Caland would have

reached this goal if they had not fallen into the idea of fix­

ation of the whole arm. In contradiction to Depp2°s fundamental

teaching Caland3 maintains that it only appears that the finger

falls on the key and that tone production results from an "ap-

parently" free fall. Is it then a question of fall or only

its appearance? It is regrettable that the intrinsically

2:<ullak, Aesthetik des I(lavie~iels. Third edition by Bischoff, 1876, p. 135. - -

32£. £!!., pp. 16 and 31.

Page 113: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

107

fruitful idea of the free fall was robbed of its further de-

velopment by the addin3 on of all sorts of fixation, tension

and pronation. Soechting, in the second chapter o~ his bro­

chure,4 gives a treatis~ . motion--a short, popul&r ?hysiology,

which contains some , • 1 ;'! .., .., ,

tn~ngs tnat are correcc as WCLL as mucn

h . T' . b" 1· ' 1 "'". • - t"h 1· t. at ~s r.vrong. ne extensJ. ). J. ty, tne e_as l.~C:l. ty or. •• c ~g-

a~cnts is supposed to effect a certain flexibility in the limbs.

The accompanying illustrations are an example of stiff, unnatu-

ral poses and attitudes which newer and better ;r:ethods have

already begun to eliminate. Arm and forearm are not differ-

entiated, consequently there is so:-;1e confusion. Paras1~aph 4

permits a single axis for arm motions. Lifting the hand at

the fingertips is declared wrong but is a necessary consequence

of a condition of relaxation and rest. It is interesting that

Soechting knows and tries to describe this condition of rest.

He is, however, still a long way from making it the real founda-

tion of technique. And when ought this necess~~J relaxed con-

dition of arm and finger muscles exist? In piano playing,

certainly. How is this, however, reconcilable with the holding

of the hand continuously in the 11 direction of the axis, 11 \vith

fingers consistently curled so that the first joint forms an

extension of the back of the hand, and with the slm..v liftin6

and dropping of fingers in the knuckle joint? And hou is such

an attack compatible with a "throw" or ''fall." Soechting sees,

4Lehre des freien Falles, Hagdeburg, n.-..•

Page 114: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

103

besides the 'tveight of the arm and h,:n:d, a tone forrning factor

in the weight of the fingers. A slight lowering of the fin3er

after a preparatory lift is said to be Sllf~icicnt ~o depress

the key. Let there be no talk of "st::ikin.g 11 th.:::; key.

draws the inherently correct consequence from the attack using

hand 'tveight--that the fingers must assune an im:;1ovc.ble, taut

position. The hand, however, is already given a tense condi-

tion in the moment of preparation. Since this is possible

only by continuous muscular action, the effect of hand weight

is illusory. The attempt to specify a center of gravity (p. 21)

is curiously amusing.

There has never been clarity about the extent and meaning

of the free fall or about the correct concept of fall. t;nat

did Deppe, the teacher of free fall, not hope to achieve with

it in a subjective way and to hear from it in the tone produced!

Correctly understood, free fall means a purely physical procedure.

That it takes place, as is thought, without muscular assistance

is not correct tvith respect to tL; living body and is not even

true with respect to the conditions in a corpse. T.te whole

limb is so organically, so tightly joined to:::;ether by the joint­

muscle apparatus from shoulder to fingertips that a purely

physical action of weight in either a small or a large portion

of the limb mass is not possible--even at the free eni. We

could speak of free fall only in the case of a falling limb

5 ·~ 19 £2· ~., p. •

Page 115: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

109

that had been amputated. As said before, wei2ht action in a .._..

living body without the organic forces of muscles and joir.ts

is not conceivable. Thus, on closer observation, the free

fall actually represents nothing more than a swinsing move­

ment of hand and finger, initiated by a light, brief i~pulse

of the flexor muscle. It is understandable that free fall

still implies action in the finger muscles. Thus, much is

demanded of the flexors (see Germer), since the elastic pro­

pelling force is dependent on the height. Tne free fall is

not enough for Germer (p. 32); he asks, rather, for a propelled

falling force that is reinforced by elastic muscular action.

It almost seems that a presenti~ent of the swingihg fonn of

motion betrays itself he~e. All sorts of experiments could

be brought forward as proof that the free fall must mean the

same thing as swinging motion. At the same time, these ex-

periments are instructive in regard to the much misunderstood

relationship between swing6 and elasticity. If one lays the

hand lightly and relaxed, palm dow:~, on a table top, and lifts

up a finger with the other hand and immediately lets it go,

then the finger springs back the more noticeably the flatter

and more outstretched the position of hand and fingers. In

this hand position the flexor muscles are already someiilhat

passively extended and become more so with further passive

extension through outside assistance. However, if one executes

6The word 11 Sch'ivung 11 has been translated as swir;g. English word takes in all meanings of this vJorc!. meanings will be clear, hmvever, in context. T:.:.e

~~o sin3le The vario;:.s translato::.

Page 116: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

110

the lift of the same finger actively, the spn .. n;l.r:z, propelling

effect is immediately lessened or even ceases. elasticity

and muscle contraction \,7ork inti:nately tor;ether; they cannot

be separated. On the other hand, the extensors do not spring

at all. If one lays the hand on its back and tries to oroduce

a similar spring with the slightly curved fingers, he Hill not

succeed. The cause: elastic tension corresponds to the mus-

cular mass, which is much greater on the flexor side. In the

fully passive state of the fingers at rest v1hen the hand is

placed on its back, either a very miniwal elastic tension or

none occurs. Elastic tension is noticed only with passive

lifting through outside assistance. Hmvever, this does not

come into account in the attack. Even with this elastic ten-

sion mentioned, however, the springing force of the flexor

muscles is so slight that it cannot even make a key go down

or cause the hammer to strike.

It would be entirely impossible for the free finger fall

to achieve sufficient force to depress the key, considering

the shallow depth of fall and the slight potential mass of

the fingers. It can be accomplished only through the addition

of a swing, a brief contracting impulse. It is not surprising

that this muscle impulse is not felt and that the character

of the action is therefore misunderstood, for we are unable

to perceive brief, small muscle contractions, and a sensation

of relaxation in the musculature, of passivity, is connected

Page 117: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

111

with the free fall.

The free fall is thus a predominantly physiological

procedure and not a purely physicc-~1 one. ~everthelcss, the

correct conception of the assisting weight of the lir::b :Eo:L-r:-,s

its basis. In this sense, the free fall method can be viewed

as the necessary preliminary stage for a more muture physio­

logical conception and working-out of piano technique. It

vlOuld be difficult to establish 'tvhen and where the idea of

fall and of weight as a means of attack first appeared.

A. Kullak speaks of it as early as the ~ightee~ sixties.

Accordingly, the supposed priority of Deppe seems to me to

be doubtful.

In practice a separation of falling weight and swinging

motion is not possible. It was logical, then, that some

individuals would move ahead to the application of hand and

forearm weight--thus Germer, Breithaupt and others. These

authors get no further in their theories than forearm weight,

hardly mention the upper arm at all and in addition cling

obstinately to finger technique, a mechanically inexplicable

thing. One could hardly believe it possible that the same

Breithaupt who demonstrated such extraordinarily great compre­

hension of the weight of a freely swung arm in describing the

playing of Teresa Carreno could say elsewhere in the same is­

sue of Husik: "Technique is nothing else but the precisely

executed, physiologically correct, controlled action of

Page 118: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

112

certain muscles--the extensor muscles in the individual

fingers." I maintain that the pertinent criticism of the

playing of a great artist by a professional musician is an

unconscious and therefore all the more valuable witness, al-

though it is indeed in full contradiction to the theory pet

forth by him. I find my own observations fully confir..:-ted by

this, and I feel certain that only physiology is in a position

to resolve the conflict in respect to the incongruity of the

playing of an artist and the school tradition.

T. Bandmann,7 a pupil of Depoe, arrived at the correct,

physiological fundamental conceptions by an entirely different

route and therefore sped much ahead of the other authors.

Led on by her extremely acute self-observation and by an ex­

act study of her arm and shoulder motions, she found the throw

as the basic form of all attack. She has, in my opinion,

established the outlines of the correct norm in piano tech­

nique for the future. In her first publications forear~m ro­

tation as the real keystone of the system was still lacking.

65. All our movements are movements of a bodily mass in space,

influenced by weight or gravity. In every movement, even the

most strongly muscular, heaviness of mass plays a very defi-

nite role as weight or load. This v;reight must be overcome

when moving away from the ground and is used unconsciously

in movements going in the direction of the ground. T~us,

7Tony Bandmann, Die Gewichtstechnik des Kl __ a_v_ ie_--rspi.el~. Lei0zi0~. 1907. -- ---------- - - ··' '

Page 119: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

113

this weight comes intQ_ effec!:_ in the att~ck ~~ \velJ:., ~nd

~~!:. pe eliminated for a ~en~. Formerly neglected, the

influence of gravity must henceforth be appreciated. The m~­

sician ought not to believe that it is a matter of arbitr~~y

innovation. He may not suppose that he ever plays, even in

the softest attack, \vithout the effect of mass and gravity

(67), even when he fights it as something wrong, something

to be overcome. Characteristic statements illustrating the

ignorance of professional musicians are easy to find. Let

the following phrase, 8 contained in one of the most recent

works, be cited as a crude example: "Overcoming the laws of

gravity and inertia is the goal o£ mechanical practice." Sven

"the laws"--what anarchy!

66. All our limbs represent masses which, moving against each

other, have a definite mechanical effect on one another. These

reciprocal influences are the object of joint and muscle me­

chanics as a science. To say that all parts of the arm, shoul­

der, and torso up and down to the point of pelvis support take

part (52) in even the smallest movement in finger attack, even

if in an unconscious, imperceptible way, is no more than to

express the reciprocal influenc.e of these masses. Here the

highly intricate laws of whole and partial centers of gravity

in our organism come to light. If \ve move a limb as a mass

by muscular force, we perform mechanical work with the help

8zuschneid, ££· cit., p. 4.

Page 120: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

114

of the mass and the velocity imparted to it. All movement,

even the most delicately technical, obeys the laws of wor~

output. 'A'a s so+- ~n r-r··--"on .L i S ) "- l. ..i- .. L•V L. ...:_ ... ce:.. ... tain ve:loci.ty, repre-

sents a definite cua~~~:v of . . It

represents--in contrast to stat~c, notcntial forc2--a living

working pov1er ~ t1-:.e

force is determined, c:s 'i:.7e knO';-l~ c7 the product of ::-,ass and

velocity. If the force be f, the mass ~' the velocity ~' then

force i:.~icre.::..ses . ,. 1.:: rJ o~- v o:: l."C

the sarJc, 1 . Ll.O':JCVer,

diminishes or if v increases a~~ ~ correspondingly diminishes,

This forr:mla

by a change in v (17). This "'! .. _, ,

explal.ns atso r..-Jny \·le can

produce all levels of energy and a.:.:e::c:.:;.in::; pmver only with

gradations of velocity, in view of the constant mass of the

ann.

67. In a movement such as the :C\:ey attack the t·Jhole mass of

the arm is alvJays rJoved. t~le. ca1.: t:evcr set a separat:e and

isolated hand or finger mass in motion for mechanical reasons

(52) because the v~1ole limb mass represents a freely movable

system, suspended at several points. \·Je must simply reckon

with this fact and draw the conclusions from it >::Vithout ?rej-

udice. Thus every player· in every attack has set t:l-:.:: :.::c: ; s

Page 121: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

115

of his \-J}lole arrn in motion countless tirr;,::s. He h-::ts never

purposefully exploited this motion in a

stiff.

in a mechanical-physiological s2nse i..: t-"e h:-'-c: a:lo:?ed the

body to be free, £ollov1in3 natu:.:-c.i_ lm·ls. The v7~-:ole arm

Hould then

of itse:~ ~ave nroduced the att&ck~nn ' ~

cf the

action of c:::-.ly , .. , "l

n::..s ooay

to =he ~oment o~ tone p~oduction, he vzc._:ld

have chanced upm~~ tb.e S\.v::..~:ging rc.ct::..c:.1 as a property already

acquired.

68. category the mis-

understanding of respect to its e:'{tent and

duration must be pointed out. :·:ost layrnen imagine muscle

Cont--~~ct~on as some~n~-- ~o-co~ c~i~~ co~·ru1s~vo an~ ~ .... .. .... .1...l0 _ .~.. ..... ,.~ ""l.-.L-, ~•" ~ .1. -=, • u

crude. pla:..:.si ble

grounds, of course, of the maxi':~:..::::t of muscular contraction.

At least certain vieHs found chiefly in more recent authors

are Only ~0 ·D~ exnl~~~ca3 •~ t~~c - ~ t: • l u.J..~~'- .l.l• 1 .... ..., i/Jay. In contrast to the free

fall as the self-styl2d totality of all possible advantages,

there is a fondness £or co::1necting the idea of rauscle cc::1-

traction 'tvith rough, m.s.chine-like pm,Jer. Fe~ these a~~: =s

Page 122: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

116

it does not have

r:,70l.~~\.-?:.""oclucirl~~ tis s u.2

. . t. . J ' pany1ng assoc1a lens w~:~ athlet:_cs.

laym·::m lies in such confusion of t2::·;·::s.

pressions are almost invariably ve~Led by co~§on secondary

In this category belong expressions

such as tendon, nerve, contraction, throw, swing, elasticity,

1 1 ' mass, wor~, oaa, etc. ~-:us icia:.1D :-:.-:,.lS t. learn to beco:-:12 ac-

quainted '<;·;rith the strict~ scienti_ c :nec.ni:ng of such te1:.:ts.

A r:-,uscle is cont::c~c ~io11 ~ from

a small fraction of a millimeter to a third of the total length

of its fibres. It is any

desired length of time, fro:n a s:·:;all f::action of a second to

the limit determined by fatigu.:::. Brief rao~d delicate mo-:~ .i.. ...... '

vJith a certain medium degree of strength, tl-:.e r:rllsculc-.Lr con-

traction will thus act in such a way as to impart a swinging

motion to a skeletal part 1 • "l .. ,....

'I;·Jl11Cn :::.s :c:cee .- . ., :r:rom t:ne influence

of other pmv-ers, even though this cont::-action is cf only :-:10-

mentary, fleeting duration. This motion p2rsists far beyond

the moment of imoulse in conseouence of the force of inertia. ' .

If one sets a fl)T\vheel in motion ~;vith a very light touch, the

motion persists for a rather long time after the touch ba2ause

Page 123: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

117

of swinging or centrifugal force. The quicker we execute any

motion whatever, the closer the motion comes to being a S'i.·ling.

Thus every player has used the swinging motion countless times

in any attack which, correspondins to the: .,_-~c:..t1.:;.::e of the instru-

ment, is ,. b . -or r~et, ~ornentary this 'i.vithout

thinking about it as soon as he lets hi~self go ~n a moment

of less anxious attention to finger technique. Indeed, even

in this t ., . ., . .. .., ..... 1 ..... t1 ecnn~que ne ~s unconsc~ousLy Iorcec LO use ~e S\·ling-

ing motion.

69. .• • •1 -· 1 1 cnat one: occas~onnlLY !~nas t1e expressions

throw and svrLnz in the lite::..-ature, but it can probably be said

for~ of motion is un-

known. Only T. an

exception. The irnporta:r~ce of t:1e S\.,Iing as the nor·mal ~ physic-

logical foundation for the motion of attack will be presented

in Section VI.

In daily life 1:ve allm.v S\vingirlJ force to take over much

more vJOrk from the muscles than those imagine 't·Jho think only

of unbending, persevering muscular contraction in connection

with the body' s expenditure o _,: energy. 9 The ruo s t obvious

example is the thrm.ving motion itself, the svlinging, far-

reaching arm motion when tossing a stone, for exawpls. The

relatively great and distantly realized Hork output and veloc-

ity is achieved by means of maximum muscle impulse limited to

9o. Fischer, Paul Richer.

Page 124: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

118

time span.

According to the la\v of inertia the moving mass con-

tinues in motion as long as it is ~ot ~~Deded or i~hibited

by an outside cause. A tossed stc·::e o:..~ 2 shot tr<'t:nsfers its

~:-Jhole vital force with r;-;o::.~e or le~:;s viole:-~c: c:::::2::ct to the body

struck. If a vleight, S\vinging from a Doint of suspension falls

on or a0ainst another ' ., oocy, the tvhole vital

Hhat lies beneath it at t:!e point of contact. Cc:tmec ted t.vi th

this is the fact that we have the feeling that the vital en-

ergy is fingertips vk1ere they

contact the key.

to recognize just-as-charac~eristic povJer loss

whenever the muscles actively e~gcga in disturbing the swing

(82). It is a matter of sensatio~ muscle

and skin pressure senses. However. le~ me ex~ressly. warn " .

against the idea that this sens~tion should continuously be

controlled or consciously perfected during play (~5). If one

once becomes acquainted with th~s feeling, the organism func-

tions from then on fully unconsciously, although delicately

and precisely. I l . 1" ' . ~ . 1"' ' d , n t~1s 1gnt c~e ~eaGer w1 1 unaerstan tne

fundamental difference bet~;.;een this and the conceptions indi-

cated above (35) as false--for 2XC.;"C-;ple, Jae11 e s.

70. Just as in bowing a string2d instrument,lO th2 importance

lOHere as Hell as th2re, the same basic error. '.::'c~is p~Y.l.: ~s to the same source of error, namely a lack of abilit/ tc" ,~ :~nc: observe.

Page 125: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

119

of the wrist in piano attack has always been misunderstood

and greatly overestimated. The most important movem2nt which

is, with the wrist motionless, has always been v~ewed as a

wrist motion. Although their efforts to make this matter clear

deserve every recognition, even those m1.1sicians vJho have oc-

cu?ied themselves in recent years v1ith studying the attack

physiologically have not come to the point of zrasping the

lead-

• .c . 1 ~ng .Lrom ::ae elbow to the base of the hand. It is not a ques-

tion of ~,;hether the rotation move;:-:~ent is more or less exactly

described but solely a qt:estion of ~.;:-:ether the motion is

grasped in its physiological importance, l) as motion from

th 1 b • • .,_ d r. \ < ' ' , • h ' 1 , e e Y.'l JO~nL., an· LJ .::s cne mosc L~g •. c.!.y S\vinging motion

~ 1' ' .:1"1 A-or a L ooul y movemenL.s. Genner mentions the turnin3 notion

and th2 rotation joint of the forearm. The latter is not

supposed to lie in the elbow joint, hm-vever, for Gc:.:r:-:1.er re-

serves this for flexing and extendin~ the forearr:1 (p. 7).

On p. 23 this raising and lowering is designated as a 11 vcr-

tical motion." On p. 24 he says: the radius and cubitus

participate in turning the wrist; this produces a shaking back

and forth of the hand. Although Ge1~1er knows far oore about

forearm rotation than most other authors, he is not clear,

however, about the relationship of this motion with t~e £~~~w

Page 126: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

120

joint--anatomically the

point--and \vith the mu::;cle struct', .. L·ce of the uppe1· arm.

Breithaupt and

turning motions by soyir:;::; that al:-.1cs:: (!) c::ll. de?2nd on

elbo\v. On p. 283 he s&ys of the forec-.rr.:1 t~1at it :Ls able; to

execute not only vertical but also horizont:c:l motions (both

completely false and misleading dc:sign~tions) 'l.bich are ex-

tre;·.:ely important for 11many 1Y rotc:.tion movemc:nts.

executed vJith immobile fin~ers by a quivering motion \vhich

extends from the forearm, over the fi:."'Zlly-held 'I.·Jris t) to the

hand. T . "'1 . t' ..... . 'b . r~L s -vn n ... wo ne1.gn or1.nz fi11.g2rs are played by

rocking the hand 'i:vith a relativc:ly passive forear:n." Herken-

thin calls it an "indirect raotion of attack."

E. Caland (Techn. Ratschlo.e'.!:~, pp. 17 and 25) r:1eans fore-

ar;a rotation by her "shaking motio:1. 11 of the hand. ..\lthou:;h

ttis is never clearly said, it can be deduced from the illus-

:::--a tions, p. 13. Cal and employs the '1 sl-:aking motion 11 only

for certain passages. -r=1 x'"'d ...__ c ' pronate:d arm and hand posi-

tion rules out general use of the rr:otion. :.:::eneral use should,

of course, be the case.

Jaell's precepts regarding rotation are as follows: Th2

rotation movement is performed only t~rough the infll· c·c:.c2 of

turning motions of the ha:1d (!). Sls·J.:~~::ion of the ::<'.:;·; .. c

Page 127: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

121

the fifth-finger side is supposed to induce increas2d tension

in the elbow and in the arm and torso muscles.

ac~ive muscular effort, noHhere a rotating S'i·Jing, 1 • 't .. vJ::l.l.C .1, 1.n-

deed, is rendered impossible by "static .s.ct::vi ty 11 and ir:di vid-

ual finger action.

Bosquet (QQ. cit.) , speaKs

he seems to mean forear::1 rotation. ~c~2:::e c.::m 1>::: r.c doubt that

rotation has actually been used to a far greater excent than

one would assume from these teacbin·-·s ...... and that all the success

achieved is expressly d~e to it.

He vJho thin~.::s o:1ly about the >;n.·ist mt:.st understc.nd that,

.. 1 .. ~ . b l . ,.. , . ' 1) . Ln count.ess manl.pulatl.ons, ot1 not1.ons or tne wr1.sc, _ ra1.s-

ing and lowering, 2) side\·Iays ab- and c;.dduction, are combined

with forearm rotation. Indeed, every rapid, delicate, spirited

and graceful motion can be traced back to th2 co-operation of

rotation. The mechanical importance of rotation in piano

technique lies in the fact that rotation eliminates the wrist

tion. Rotation takes their place c.nd est,::blishc::s a connection

betHeen fingertips and elbmv, indeed beyond this point to the

shoulder along the entire muscular structure. Ue shall see

later that the wrist and finger joints assume a relatively

subordinate role (75, 91).

Rotation is represented in its purest form in the octave

tremolo. The ~ovrist does nothing in this action. In this

Page 128: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

122

rotation is well i<.:.'l.mvn to .,.-..~, '! C' -~ ...... '1 ..,~ , ... ~ .......... ~ -"- .... .._~o..L .... J!) if not:

ognized as such, since it is, at least generally, ~r~ced back

to wrist motion. A few authors are better acs~ai~ted with

rotation; they knmv no one

has really understood the n:echanism of rote:.tion r:::ove:nen t:.

This knmvledge is, hmvever, indispe:-:sa:.::.le as :Lt ' . U2.S1.C

condition for a real understandin~ of Di.ano tcchniaue. u • •

71. Rotation is the only n-:otion \vhich provides freedom ~ :crom

fi-3er technique. It function is to incorporate all finger

t . ' d" ..... 1 _,_. . t ., . .r:· d mo :Lon, as suoor :Lnate part..:La :r,ou:.on, :Ln o 1::1e unJ...,:::te mo-

tion as a vA~ole. Such freedom can only be achieved by rota-

tion. I ..... ' 1. ., .., ,. ,-.. . I :::,:..., ) "-' t t was est..ao :Lsnea oerore \~~ ~na

too, the turning of the upper a:.:.-:·,: Oi'l a longitudinal or rota-

tional axis running from shoulder to elbow. cannot be elimi-,

nated, when the hand is moved ov2r the keyboard in a purely

sidewise direction. On

be suppressed, if one absolutely so wishes, although, to be

sure, artificially and more or less forcibly. ,,..,. .c 1ne use OL a

hand guide (guide-main) is one of these unnatural mca.ns for

this, for in natural move3ents wrist and elbow joints are al-

"..vays linked together. 2very playe::.·, even the most rabid fin-

ger technician, has used the rotation movement coun.tless

times--of that there ca~ be no doubt. In broken chords, in

leaps of several octaves there is no other possibility. The

two functions of the elbow joint belong inseparably to:;2ther.

Page 129: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

123

Linked 'tvi th this is upper arm rotation, 'tvhich naturally ac-

cor.1panies forearm rotc:tion in many functions. The inner con-

nection of all these movenents will not escape precise and

attentive observation. This conn.;::ction is especially intimate

and unified in the swinging motion (74).

7 2. Forearr.1 rotation is distinguished mechanically by t'tvO

special characteristics.

1. The mov.-=ment takes· place in an advantageously con-

structed turning mechanism, consistins of tHo joints combinGd:

above, in the elbow, an extraordinarily movable, flat ball

joint, and below, over the base of the hand, in a second joint • ~ ~ • ... ,.. of- ....... ,_,. • Just as :rree to rotate. .tvvo JO~nts r:or one ro1-aL~on-- ~.-n~s ~s

an exceptional occurrence in the body~ 't·Jhich produces a special

mechanical effect--the secure and free operation of the rota-

tion s true ture. Rotation must be v21.7 closely observed in

the light of these mechanical peculiarities.

2. In addition, the hand, v1:..th its large and heavy mass

in proportion to the small diameter of the rotational joint,

is attached to the rotational axis like a flyv1heel ~ so to

speak, with a relatively large diameter. The dia~eter of this

flyv1heel becomes larger or smaller according to the extension

of the thumb and fifth finger. With full extension it is

relatively large. '1"". ,.. .1.ne:r-er:ore, . th t' . ' d . t- • +- ' • w~ . n~s nan pos~v~on ro~ac~on

is an especially light swing: for example, with the octaVQ

tremolo.

Page 130: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

Corresponding to its mechanically favorable arrangement,

forearm rotation is ahead of all other motions in velocity.

One can prove this to himself without complic&ted measuring

devices by counting 't·Jith a metrono.-ne set at SO a~1.d comparin;s

rotation \vith other joint motions. riJhile the 1-:::..•,hest number c...·

of possible successive strokes of one finser va~ies between

five and at most eight per seco~d, the correspondins number

for rotation lies between nine and tw~lve. Accordingly,

pianists may judge for themselves how they have robbed them-

selves of mechanically superior motion by intentionally elim-

inating rotation.

The rotation movement consists of a rolling back and forth,

an inward rotation or pronation .s.:--.. d an out"·lard rotation or

supination. The direction of motion is most easily indicated

thus: from the player's view, supination takes place in his

right arm clockwise; in the left arm, of course, the reverse.

The ease of swing in rolling im·1:1rd (pronation) is greater

than in rolling outward (supination) for definite physiological

reasons. This is the reverse of the situation in regard to

bowing. According to the anatomical muscle organiza~ion,

rotation is always easier in the direction which corresponds

to the curve of the forearm. In piano attack this is the op-

posite from what it is in bowing.

73. The individual motion of pronation or supination attains

great velocity through a relatively small m~scul.s.~ impulse

Page 131: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

125

due to its mechanically favorable :or~ and easy mobility.

If, in general, the swing is said to be mec~anically favored

by short muscles \vith a large diamete::;:-, by

ball-like joints

the favorable conditions a~e most

rotation. A slight impulse is sufficient fer each back-and-

forth swing and sufficient to propel the swinging mass, the

forearm and hand. Therefore, rotation is especially suited

to the swinging motion.

In addition, however, there is still a second point.

Due t ..._, 1 . t. o ~ne museu ar organ~za ~on the upper arm and shoulder

every S'tvinging motion from the shoulc,:;;::- is linked easily and

directly with a swinging rotation. Thereby, rotation is in

itself designated to be the transnitter of impulses from the

shoulder muscles to the hand. From this a complete motion

of a very special kind results: n::r::::ely of a unity of origin

and execution which represents the exact opposite of all the

isolated, "independent, 11 separate motions of previous tech-

nique. It is thus the unity of the S'tvinging motim1 which makes

it so well suited, as the medium of true technique, to serve

as the direct expression of the will. How often in daily life

do we make use of this r..-;echanically and at the same time aes-

thetically superior characteristic of the swinging motion!

One might observe himself. Even 't·Jalking is impossible \·7i thout

Page 132: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

126

it and jumping, dancing~ running, etc. even more so. Every

pianist has uncou.scim:sly and necessarily utilized it count-

less times to the mockery of all finger technique and one-sided

gymnastics.

h h f=. 1' .r:: h To put toget er a istory o~ p1ano tecnnlque ~rom t .e

physiological vewpoint from the time of Diruta and ~1atheson,

from the influences of Bach through Liszt, would be a task

worthy of praise. Perhaps .it would reveal that the swin3ing

motion natural to the arm was already used 'i.·Ji th the forerunners

of the piano even though entirely unconsciously. It can even

be said that hardly any other motion was possible, since this

was the most natural and purposeful motion and since distorting

influences such as hammer mechanics and gymnastics were not

t 1 t ~, ·~ c~ · ~~ t ~l · h ) 11 -· as ye preva en • we1~zmann ~e1rrer -~ e1sc .er rnenL10ns

the playing of the virginalists and gives a sixteenth century

illustration which pictures the easy, unrestricted hand posi-

tion of a \...roman playing Hl:ile the fourth and fifth fingers

even hang off the lteyboard. This position was sui ted to the

playing technique in any case, but it is designat~d in the

place cited as a "violation of a leading principle." For,

thinks Seiffert, the editor of one of the oldest manuals of

keyboard technique, Diruta, a pupil of Xerulo (1533-1604),

had already required that the fingers remain prepared in a

llceschich te der Klaviermusik. Leipzi0r:.r, Brei tkon, f und Haertel, ts9-9(var:-f->:-P. -o~-. - -

Page 133: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

127

,.. , d . \ . h 1 . • ,. t' f speciric nan pos:t.tio:-1 .1over1.ng over t e .<.eys--:t.nc,J.ca l.VC o

the pedantic penchant for rules and precepts which has ah1ays

reigned. 1;!.::-dght playir:.(;s muscular relaxation, must have; bcc;n

expressed at t hat t~r:-e ~~ t 1.~_,_·s h~nd ~1 o.~i~~o~., h •. un~ on three •• 4." ...... - u ---- . • • ~ •

fingers.

vJi tn the use

position.

The development of recent piano technique proves \vi thout

doubt that rotation and exclusive.

No'~ a trace of rotation is to be found in the older -oure kinds

of finger technique of the seventies and eighties. At the

very time of their appearance, ho\vever, cane the first sug-

ges tions &.id at tempts to attack by r,1eans of \·leis;ht. In all

respects mass weight and rotation prove their interdependence.

The unifying motion is also the 11 large" motion. It bears in

itself the imprint of unmistakable intellectual mastery in

comparison with the small, mechanized and spiritless finger

motion.

74. How is rotation to be exploited in technique? As we saw,

its motion form, favoring a light S\·Jing, mal"-es it •vJe.ll sui ted

first of all for co-operation with the swinging upper-arm motion

from the shoulder, for incorporation of the effect of the upper-

arm swing and for its transmission to the fingertips. The fur-

ther distribution of the swing is then accomplished through the

anatomical position of the fingers fo~ rotation (75). 'Chus

Page 134: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

128

apparently disparate elements of the 'I.·Jhole S\vin.:;iu.::; r::.otio::.1.--

impulse from the shoulder, raising, low2rins ~nd ~ocation of

the forearm down to the fin~ertios--inte~r2te ._, ' ~ th.2c:1s2l ves in !:o

a mechanical unity (73).

In line 'l.vi th what has been said

intellectual

co-ordinating all individual actions together into a \vhole,

the swinging motion, involving all the muscles and joints of

the arm, represents a systematic, co-ordinated mechanism felt

as a single unit vlhich adapts itself in countless variations

of form, acceleration and range to the ever-changing demands

of musical performance. It can be understood how any muscle

action not adapted to the whole disturbs the swing, its free-

dom and its effect in terms of work, such disturbing muscle

actions being the individual raising and lowering of fingers

which fall outside of the frame of the complete action.

75. Rotation and the raising or lifting of fingers are mu-

tually exclusive. The manner of directing the attack is co:n-

pletely different in each: in the one, a swinging impulse from

above, in the other a fixation far up the arm. Of course,

the width of the keys demands the same finger spread in each

case and with it an active engagement of the small muscles

on the back of the hand. This engage~ent is undesirable, since

;t can be a source o-F many e~_rors. H ' ·1 f" h ... ~ · • O'l.>7ever, vJnl. e 1.nger tee -

nique presumes a. ready position of the finge:.4 over tl-:~: :<ey a:1d

Page 135: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

120

an unchanging pose, the swinging and rotating attack requires

, . h ..... ff . t. . th l ~ t ~1g t SL1 enLnS ac 1on 1n e muse es, necessary tor rans-

mitting the vital energy to the finzer tips, only in the mo-

ment of attack. The "stiffening" of the attaddng finger is

always a mom2ntary and, once again, a S\·Jinging motion. It

because it is then engtiged in the far smaller suooortinba activ-.'

i ty of the finger muscles, to support the playing v1eight.

The chief point in this stiffening is that the impulse racing

down from the shoulder engages every muscle in turn, and that

the finger muscles take up the swing momentarily and transmit

it further. T:'"lus, they transfer not their O'l.vn small pm.;rer,

produced close to the key, but that of the large swinging force

from above. Hov1 incomparably smaller, however, is this momen-

tary swinging, tensing muscle action than maximum lift \.vi th

subsequent flexion. If one observes the anatomical position

of the five fingers (slightly extended) in relation to the

middle and base of the hand, the likeness to a wheel mechanism

when rotation is added comes involuntarily to mind. The fin-

gers form, as it were, the spokes of a wheel rotating on a

longitudinal axis which, running from the little finger over

the fourth, third and second to the thumb, effects pronation

and in the reverse direction supination. The curved, "arched"

hand moves approximately as if it held a ball in its arch and

executed a rolling motion with it. For this the uneqt::sl 1 e~ot'n ........ ..... 0 •

Page 136: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

130

of fingers--as if in scorn of all attempts at c~ualizntion--

is even of considerable advantage. Such a turning h"heel leads

t . ~· 1 t,ne keys w;~L.h ne ~~ngers as soo~es over ~

which belongs to rotation. In this vJay perfor::-Jar.ce of the

most rapid succession of tones in both do~mvJard ar:d upv;c-.::-cl

directions is made possible, without any active effort ~rom

the extensors and flexors and with only the slight extension

demanded by the distances on the keys. In fact, the velocity

of such a succession of tones is never eve~ a~proxisntcly

reached by individual raising fingers i:vi th

a motionless hand, the characteristics of the old technique.

Nature provides us, through rotation, with sufficient speed

and does not enjoin the use of individual finger action. As

T. Bandmann has correctly pointed out, with the little-hammer

method each tone demands an extending (lift) and a flexing

(attack) motion, thus, for five tones up and do"tvn, eighteen

muscular actions. In contrast, by rolL.ng back and forth tHo

motions for the whole are sufficient. The swinging motion is ___ _._. ----·- --thu§_ Q._q_werful an<! ecol}_q__mical at the ~_?.me !_ime. Also in this,

the simplest imaginable kind of passage, lies the reason i:vhy

legato is so much easier and more natural with finger motions

controlled by rotation than with those consisting of raising

and lowering for each tone. It has already been demonstrated

that the connection of tones is also favored mechanically by

an arm resting in a passive condition.

Page 137: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

SECTION VI

THE BASIC PHYSIOLOGICAL FORH FOR THS ATTAC~CING t·WTION

7 6. ~·:hoever has followed the course of the preceding o bser­

vations attentively will have noticed

that the object is ever~vhere the swinging form of arm

motion in the attack,

that this form of motion has long been in use and cannot

be dismissed,

that this motion is employed 'tvhere professional musicians

have not even dreamed of it previously,

that it must be, simply, the motion of attack.

It fulfills the two basic conditions which are posed in

common by the construction of the instrument and the construc­

tion of our organism: 1) the momentaE,Y effect on the key, and

2) the utilization of that form of vit~l for~ in the arm which

is most suited to our musculature. One could almost say that

this form could be theoretically and logically deduced had

it not been known and used for a long time. The further con­

ditions required of a basic form of piano attack coincide w·ith

the elimination of the errors pointed out in the previous sec­

tions. Tnese conditions are as follows:

1. elimination of isolated finger technique through the

131

Page 138: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

132

assistance of rotating r,~o-::ion,

2. participatio~ of all parts of the iimb ' a11a elimina-

tion of all fixation,

3. exploitation of the po\·: . .:::r -. ~-. -{- '!-: -::':\ _.;.1 ~ .... ._ lar~e r::uscles

,... or

the limb.

4. freedom from dull, rnech~n~c _ excrc~sc,

5. conservation of power, th~s oreventinp fc..ti~ue, ' ~ ~

6. greatest possibility for srarlation of tonal intensity,

7. smallest expenditure OJ:: resting on the

key as string vibration conti'r:.ues.

A , . 1 . • ' . ccora~ng_y, c~e oas~c forr.1 in the rr.otion of attack can

be specified briefly as

of al.-cn

from the shoulc:c:r do't·l'_"! i~1 coU . .::boration \·Jith a ·--- --·- ~----... ~----- ----- -- ~----·-·--------- -----

isolated finger technique. --------- ---------·- The unitv and naturalness --·-··- __ __...{_. ---- ··-~·----·--of the

v.7hole mot~ £2.'J2Si~t:_ p_£eC~§_C?=_lY_ in tl~is f<l.~'!:.·

77. This question next comes to mind: can the swinging motion

be analysed precisely enough so tl~.at it can be explained and

taught? In my opinion, there is ~o plausible reason that c~n

Page 139: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

133

be cited in opposition. The initial difficulty of explaining

and teaching it should be no obstacle. It is, incidentally,

really difficult only for those '>vho have been brought up in

the generation of muscle gymnastics. :.Jith unspoiled and t.:::.l-

ented children no difficulty arises) accord:n8 to the expcri-

ence of T. Bandmann. ~ .. i'hen an artist • • 1J ..

ac~-i.J.2\72S rl:LE";

own via intuitive and creative intellectual effort, talent

alone discovers the v.my. No doubt it would be better if no

one Y.Jithout talent ever stuck a key. l·Im,Jever, with the help

of indirect means, physiological mechanics, as vJell as forms

of technical motion perceived in an artist it is possible to

represent the inner organization of the attacking motion.

This train of thought, which is the basis of my v7hole '>·lOrk,

is to be adopted here. It is highly probable that, via

pedagogy, the sense of the motion can be make sufficiently

clear, even to a child or youthful beginner.

It is clear that what differentiates the swinging motion

appreciably from other motions--apart from its outer form--

is found chiefly in the condi~ion of tensio~ in the musculature.

Accordingly, the first question to be answered is: \vhat is

this condition before, at the time of, and after the swing?

As has been said above (68), the muscular contraction

lasts only a short time. It gives only the impulse to the

motion and then leaves the mass to itself and its inertia.

Contraction and relaxation, activity and passivity (42) thus

Page 140: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

alternate v;ith extreme rapidity. Before and after the impulse,

the same condition of passivity, relaxation, repose and lack

of contraction in all muscles must occur. If a sudden im-

pulse is intended to lead to motion, the mass to be moved must

be found in readiness and repose immediately beforehand. It

must not be influenced by the effects of other forces. Ap­

plied to the arm: if the driving force of some muscle group

is to be effective, all active muscles must first be brought

into a passive state. Any activity still present is an obstacle

to be removed first. Only the mere passive state or state of

repose of the whole musculature fulfills these conditions.

On the other hand: if the movement so initiated is to swing

freely then the effects of no other forces interrupting the

swing should influence or divert it after the impulse. This

condition too is fulfilled only by a condition of muscular

passivity.

78. A condition of muscular passivity is one which is ahmys

prepared (77, 84) and which is, at the same time, satisfied

with a minimum amount of muscular force. Passivity is possi­

ble in any situation o~ position of the arm, whether it is

suspended loosely, tvithout support, at the side of the body,

or v7hether it is supported somewhere from the shoulder dovm

to the fingertips. Accordingly, 1) passive suspension, and

2) passive position can be differentiated. In passive arm

suspension the muscular effort is obviously zero. One part

Page 141: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

135

is suspended from the other with no active effort of will,

held together solely by the organic structure of muscles,

tendons and ligaments. In contrast, "<-.rhen the fingertips are

placed on the ~eyboard as supports--a temporary concEtion i.\7hich

occurs repeatedly in piano playing--a cert~in force is reqcircd

to sustain the weight of the arm on the fingertips (75). Both

forms of the passive state, passive suspension as i.vell as pas­

sive position, occur, the latter, of course, much more fre­

quently. The former interests us on special grounds: namely,

for use as a comparison "<·lith the feeling of muscul.:;.r relaxa­

tion or repose occuring in various other positions. Corre­

sponding to what was said above (46), that we cannot sense

degrees of muscular contraction if they are not extreme or

differentiate their sensations consciously, the fact that we

cannot differentiate degrees of tension between passive sus­

pension and passive position through finger support is self­

explanatory. The important thing is: we have the feeling of

complete relaxation when the arm is weighted passively in spite

of the supporting effort of the finger muscles.

Everything depends on learning to know and, further, to

feel consciously this condition of passive weighting as de­

fined above. For this purpose I must ask the reader who de­

sires to become acquainted with this tool, the arm, to make

a slight digression.

lunong the infinite numbers of degrees of vleight 'i.,Ji th \Jhich

a finger can rest on the keyboard or some other obj c:c·'- )f :upport

Page 142: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

136

three can be distinguished as extreme states [Grenzzustacnd£7:

1. Haximum weighting.

~~bile seated, place the five fingers in a moderately

curved position on the edge of a table in front of the chair

and support the arm on the five fingers Hhile pressing it as

hard an possible. The fingers are nm·;r carr~7 i!:[I; the r::.:::..::i:r:urJ

weight. It need scarcely be pointed out that r.1axir.1um \veight­

ing is out of the question in piano technique and is mentioned

here theoretically, solely as a way of clarifying the other

forms of weighting.

2. Zero weighting.

Place the fingers in the same position so that they just

touch the support (table top or keys).

Between these two extremes of 'tveighting there is an in­

finitely great number of intermediate levels. Of these, the

one mentioned above is of particular interest.

3. Passive weighting or weighting for playing.

It is difficult to convey an understanding of this be­

cause, as experience shows, the large majority of people,

especially those accustomed to exaggerated muscular effort

and gymnastics in piano playing, do not, as a rule, grasp and

learn it readily. An attempt will be made to define it as

exactly as possible, since it is the physiological basis of

piano technique and, unconsciously, always has been. Once

learned, such weighting for playing cannot be forgotten and

Page 143: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

137

is available at any time. People who know it can explain it

readily. Heighting for playing comes about \vhen the \veight

of the limb rests on the fingers (as in the position above).

79. Let us first compare these three forms of weighting in

order to become better acquainted with their characteristics.

Apart from slight errors, we can count the 'tveight of the arm

itself from the shoulder down as the same in all three cases.

If the weight mass remains the same, then the differences are

to be sought in the degree of rnusular activity. In maximum

weighting there is extreme action of all muscles which are

in any position to operate in a dm.m-vmrd direction, the action

in individual muscles being very unequal. In zero weighting

musular action is distributed over the whole arm as one part

carries the other, and the sum of the "t.vork performed is, of

course, equal to and opposed to the weight. By simple observa­

tion it is seen that zero weighting comprises all "positions"

and "poses" of the limb and its parts in the air, 'tvi thout

props or support. The work is distributed over the muscle

groups so that the smaller muscles of the fingers bear only

the fingers, the larger, the hand. Throughout, the extensor

muscles take care of bearing the weight, since the flexors

work \nth the weight and only the extensors against it. Tne

shoulder muscles carry the whole arm including the smaller

muscles, which, in turn, carry their loads. Zero \veigh ting

occurs continually ~ ~momentary, passing condition with all

nQg-swinging movements directed upward. It should nev'":r

Page 144: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

138

It is not to

be introduced into the swing, because, for that, muscular

relaxation alone must occur. L1 zero v·;eizhting, the vJeight

is felt in the shoulder, i.n 't·Jeighting for playing, on the

five fingers.

vrnat is the to r::i..:SCt.tlar activity in

\'leighting for playing?

80. The weight of the arm is carried by the :Zi.ve fingertips

resting on the keys, apart from air pressure ancl the elastic

carryin.s forces in the s::oulder joint .s.:.;.d arour:d The

passive condition with-

out having to \vork actively--thus a condition occurs opposite

extent by the elastically strung joints and ligaments, and

tl 1 '- . . " 1 '- •• • • ne musc_e SLruccure ~s cnereoy reLlevea. The load is dis-

tri buted to the other :-n'-!scles in the forearr:1 and hand so that

h 1 d t ' t" .. , ,.. ,- t . d .... eact muse e nee ex.er on.Ly ne m::..r~lmum e:r r:or requl. re t.O

carry the load. Part of the burden of the hand and finger

skeleton is carried in the hand. The finger joints are dis-

posed, slightly curved, to each other so that one leans on

the other, similar to .:m arch ':Jhe:re one stone carries the

other. Concernin:::; the do'lrll.wm::-d pull o:c the load, it has an

effect on the tendons and muscles on the extensor side of

the hand and fin9:ers as ;:.;rell as on the flexor side that is, ~ '

the supporti~3 effort is distributed equally to the flexors

and extenso;,:-s. This sort of distribution over many

Page 145: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

opposin::; muscles is only

f 1 . _or p ay~ng.

to this kind

139

one-sided engc1gerne11t of fctc·.J rnuscles i:1 otl1e1.- fa::.T.s o~ t·r2if:).1t-

ing. For it follmvs t~12.t: each r:1uscle exerts itself only

slightly, that the rc::c:i~)rocal activity anci e:l.::.s ..::ic tc·,sion

of all muscles maintains the equilibriu~.

sensation which accompanies the relaxed condition of the

:r:usculature in Heighti:ng for playing is to ., , . ., oe cnarac~cr~zea

as a feeli~g of passivity or relaxation of all tension.

This is t::..-ue in spite of the muscular activity actually

..........,, "' • ~ • 1 .. ., :1 ~ b l . ' b 1n1.s ~s as t..onJ..snl.ng enougn ana can or~1.y a exp a::..nec y

the fact that our conscious senses cannot perceive this slight

muscular activity, let alone ev<.:luc:.te it to any extent.

The passivity of the arm -r.-ruscles irJparts a very charac-

teristic feeling which one can o~ly lea~1 to sense more clear-

ly through frequent, attcr:ti ve observc.tion vvhile comparing

weighting for playing with zero weighting several times in

succession. In going fro:-:: one to tl1e other the load is felt

to glide up to the shoulder or t:"ie reverse. 1 This sensation

lThe reason for the curious illusion in Ja2ll and Caland about the 1~~1ten~na c~~ry~no a~~~cc· 0~ t~ns4o~ J..·s ~~e~ s·-~a J... 0 L ....1.. ,...:,., a--,·- (._;;, C ...... J-\.- J.. ~ C.L ... .,_ l.L ... l..lo. <.,.;..··•'-•

T'ne s'n ld r ~ · · ,.. ~ ' ... ' · · ~ ' · - · · - - ou e censJ..on lS reLC ~o procuce a Slmllar snJ..ZCJ..ng of v7eight from the f:_~:._:J:ers up to the shoulder. One can e2.sily convince himself o:E tr:is by ma:(ing the experiment. The '1m.::::<.-. - t' ' ' ~ . ' ,.. - ~~ ( /""' 1 • ' . • J..ng ot ne aanc l~~~t: as a reatner ~aLana) J..s a~ error J..n reSO"'-Ct- t0 tJ-.:·'"- ····-'0-·'-.:--,,>,--·"-C' ~-C '-J...e -:~·!-j-.,,-.-;_-·'·-.r· ''~0'--"·or--. ~_;_,_._· i:~ a'}_c"'.-

.t. _ _ ...... .._ ••• ..._~ ... c. ... z.. ..... '-..:; v1.. L."'"' , ...... r_.-~ .............. _l..:.o ·"'·' t.-..:.... ·4 • ___ .... -- --

metrically ODDose:d to ;::-.e :free action of \.'s:: _ _,~::---:.t for. vJlJ.ich 1>/e . . '-' are striving •.

Page 146: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

is so characteristic and so essential for the pianist's

understanding of playing weight and swinging motion that

it must be accurately inculcated. It must be noted, however,

that this inculcation by means of attentive observation

serves exclusively for the purpose of understanding the proc­

esses of motion. The feeling for the correct playing vJeight

becomes progressively more unconscious and ceases to be de­

liberate, according to the fundamental axioms of practice.

81. The study of weight teaches us to know the correct nat­

ural position which the fingers have to assume physiologically

and which they do actually assume of their mm accord in the

case of the greatest possible pressure as well as of a lesser

weight on the fingertips. This is a slightly curved position

of all finger-metacarpal joints and the \VI"ist so that a kind

of arch occurs which is able to counter the greatest pressure

with sufficient resistance. Even in weighting for playing

we are aware of a spontaneous natural inclination toward this

hand position which is thus the one indicated for the attack,

adequate for every load, and most reliable for transmitting

energy to the key from above.

Accordingly, the direction of the fingertips upon meeting

the key comes about of itself. The nail joint of the second

through fifth fingers does not stand vertically on the surface

of the keys but slightly inclined (65° to 70°), an inclination

which is confirmed as the most appropriate by physioloz~cal

Page 147: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

141

observation of the tendons in the fingers. In contrast, the

thumb touches the key with the side surface of the nail joint

at about the same angle. Assuming equal weight on all finzcrs,

a line joining the nail joints of the fingcrtips (differently

formed, of course, according to the individual) forms an

approximately circular arc.

Not too much importance should be attributed, however,

to the size of the angle of attack. For, with the vital power

meeting the key in a specific direction, the position of the

fingers is rather unimportant for the effect because the key

does not represent a freely movable body. It must yield to

limiting restraints on its motion because it rotatcs on a

horizontal axis. Thus in piano playing the angle of attack

is determined less by the mechanics in the impact of the at­

tacking mass than by the position in which the individual

skeletal parts of the hand must appear at the moment of con­

tact.

It cannot be recommended strongly enough to the pianist

that he make the playing weight, given by nature to his hands

and fingers and so very frequently used, the object of thor­

ough study. It is the normal condition of the musculature,

to which the arm, of necessity, must ever again return between

any two movements, whatever they may be.

82. Weighting for playing is capable of exact mathematical

measurement. Weight measurement with a scale 't.vhich should

Page 148: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

142

not be so sensitive that it is disturbed by the countless,

s~all, involuntary oscillations in the initial contact is

best suited to this study. A spring scale with a level

weighing surface and a capacity of approximately 20.kilo­

grams is the most suitable. Measurement of maximu~ tveizht­

ing does not need to be considered at all.

Playing weight may be measured in the following way.

Place the scale at the same height as the keyboard. Let

the fingers rest on the scale in a passive condition, bear­

ing the arm weight. One learns what passivity is perhaps

most quickly in this way. Tnrough several weighings one

can arrive at a relatively exact reading from the average.

Fluctuations in individual cases will, of course, be con­

siderable. Once determined, one ·has in this measurement

of playing weight a reliable control apparatus for the most

delicate correct and incorrect muscular movements. The

shifting of the point of gravity is seen immediately, in

the torso by the fluctuations at each in- and exhalation

and the consequent raising and lowering o£ the shoulder.

Similarly, small, unconscious psychic excitation betrays

itself (the so-called ideo-motoric motions); but even the

slightest voluntary motion of the other hand, the head,

etc. causes a more or less sizable fluctuation.

If one extends a finger, a fluctuation occurs immediate­

ly, showing a positive increase in weight because a bending of

Page 149: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

143

the hand is produced, according to rule, by stretching the

finger. This increases the pressure on the scale in propor­

tion to the power of flexion. Immediately afterv;rard, hm·1ever,

follows a negative fluctuation, a decrease in weight, because

stretching the finger brings about a slight stiffening of the

finger joints and wrist which lessens the load.

The same can be observed with very minimal, hardly per­

ceptible bending of the finger. A loss of weight occurs imme­

diately.

The loss of weight with the intrusion of any active muscle

work whatever is an important and characteristic phenomenon

for pianists. It is caused by the opposing action of muscular

effort against the passive, resting weight. Extension takes a

part of the burden of arm weight away. It somewhat stiffens

the joints previously permitted to be passive and assists,

therefore, in carrying the weight.

Thus this weight measurement shows us weight loss through

any muscular action intruding upon a condition of relaxation

in a more delicate way than is possible for the senses, which

can only be cultivated after prolonged self-observation. Exact

observation will aid the senses, however, and thus make the

learning process easier. As in the experiment, every lifting

or extension of an individual finger in the attack must always

bring with it a loss of power. The slightest independent finger­

lift partially arrests the condition of passivity. It will be

Page 150: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

demonstrated (83) that the conditions of weighting for

playing apply also to the swinging motion and that, in this

motion too, every wrong musular action is a disturbance.

The weight resting on the fingertips when vJeighted for

playing ranges on the average between 500 and 1000 grams,

according to the size of the arm. If one secures pure play­

ing weight after several attempts, the scale shows this by

its relative constance. It is assumed that the arm main­

tains the same friction against clothing and chest, the same

slightly abducted position and an absolutely passive attitude

from the shoulder down. Further, the resting point of the

finger must remain unchanged.

83. If the playing weight is distributed equally on each of

the five fingers, one-fifth of the burden falls on each fin­

ger. It amounts to five times as much for the individual

finger when the weight rests on it alone. The weight can be

placed on each of the five fingers whereby even the weakest,

the fifth finger, carries the full burden.

The weight can also be transferred as fast as desired

from one finger to the other. From a state of passivity the

smallest impulse suffices to re-position the weight in the

fastest possible manner. Each re-positioning is brought about

by a small swinging motion with the assistance of forearm

rotation. The key to the explanation of balancing the fingers,

of equalization (56), which some think to be solely a matter

Page 151: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

145

of finger gymnastics, lies in this ability to distribute the

weight of the arm. The illusion of finger equalization is

very curious. Equalization can be shown and conveyed to a

reasonably intelligent beginner in the right way in a few

minutes. How much endless practicing, how much valuable time

has been squandered on this phantom of the imagination.

Still another phenomenon is clarified by playing \vcight.

The beginner is continually asked to hold his arm "loosely,"

and as a test the trick of unexpectedly lifting his arm is

used. H. Riemann (.QE.. cit.) says: ''The hand should not be

weighed down by the arm. The hand is carried by the support­

ing fingers. The teacher should check on this by suddenly

lifting the pupil's arm. The wrist must yield without the

slightest resistance."--No. The opposite is true. Passivity

occurs only when the weight of the whole arm rests on the

hand and fingers. This alone makes this test by the teacher

possible. It is impossible, however, when the arm carries

the hand. Jaell, too, cites this test as a control. Ho\'l,

with her precepts of continuous muscle tension, avoidance of

any stiffness and resistance in the joints is possible is

impossible for me at least to understand.

The demand for this test is very old, but one seeks an

explanation of how and why in vain. As one can convince him­

self by experiment, it is only in a relaxed state of all mus­

cles, with the arm weighted for playing, that a loose condition

Page 152: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

of the musculature is possible, so that the joints obey every

pressure from without. There is no condition in piano play-

ing in which less muscular effort is used than when the arm

is weighted for playing. The arm behaves like a Joos_£]. y

susQended chain, whereas active muscular effort would ma~<e

the chain tensed and fixed from one link to the next. On the

other hand, to demand looseness during the pov1erful sv1ing ~-.rould

run counter to all rules of mechanics. It must first be clear

to us where and when looseness, that is, relaxation, can be

demanded legitimately and that alternation betv1een tension

and relaxation of tension occurs continually. In the opinion

of E. Caland2 active lowering of the shoulder becomes the

center of technique, of "artistic motion." The lov1ering is

erroneously ascribed solely to the broad back muscle, whereas

actually a number of other muscle segments participate. It

is a serious regression, however, that conscious fixation of

the shoulder, even of the rib cage, is demanded and, still

more serious, that the elbow and wrist are supposed to be

internally fixed and even the fingers rigidly tensed. This

is, then, what has happened to Deppe's "free fall. 11

The grounds which Caland cites for the necessity of using

the back muscles actively would scarcely be viewed as tenable

by anyone. The first reason, "because Deppe laid it down as

a principle," cannot be taken seriously. For the other reason,

2rlavierlehrer, 1904.

Page 153: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

147

conservation of energy, no proof has been brought forth by

the writer, nor could it be.

84. In weighting for playing we have become acquainted with

a mere condition of rest, which occurs as such of~en, if more

or less temporarily, during playing. Permanent positions and

poses, which had to be pointed out as wrong and not permis­

sible with all other conditions of the musculature (79), are

exactly what is demanded of weighting for playing: it should

be the ever-recurring condition of rest and relaxation and,

indeed, as long as required or desired. All motions proceed

easily from this condition of rest. It is not necessary that

all attacking motions proceed solely from the condition of

weighting for playing. It is also possible to proceed from

other states of relaxation like the one of passive suspension.

The condition of rest in weighting for playing has shown

us much: the slight, active participation of the muscles sup­

porting the fingers, the passivity of all other muscles, the

effect of weighting for playing on hand and finger position.

In order to move the mass resting on the keyboard, whether

from a state of passive suspension or some other desired pas­

sive state, an impulse from the shoulder as the point of sus­

pension for the limb mass is required.

Although the breast bone-collar bone joint was given above

as the highest point of suspension for the limb, it is appro­

priate on practical grounds not to consider this point but,

Page 154: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

instead, the shoulder joi~t 'as the actual point of suspension.

This is based on the fact that we cannot voluntarily move the

shoulder and especially the collar bones in sympathy with arm

motions. We are able, naturally, to move the shoulder volun­

tarily in such motions as lifting, lowering, etc. In arm mo­

tions, however, where the shoulder participates in a different,

purely mechanical way, shoulder movements ensue completely

without influence from the will. I first traced these mechan­

ical, involuntary motions in 1899 and published the findings

in the Archiv fuer Anatomie und Physiologie (supplementary

volume).

The fundamental importance of the passive co~dition lies

in the fact that the equilibrium of the muscles makes the

condition of weighting for playing admirably suited for obey­

ing the smallest impulse at any moment. Muscle contraction

is never more than just what is required to carry the load.

No muscle need ever be first brought into a condition of rest

from a state of activity. This lability and preparedness

represents the mechanically most important characteristic of

the weighted-for-playing state.

The same passive condition reigns before as well as after

the swinging attack. This fact is especially important. Piano

technique often requires in legato that the weight remain rest­

ing on the key, on one or more fingers. Thus a condition be­

tween two swings with no active muscular action, the least

Page 155: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

149

conceivable exertion and the slightest conceivable fatigue

is exploited in a practical way. The fingers carrying the

playing weight become, in a real sense, supporting fingers

(89).

How does the musculature act during the swinging mot~on?

This is taught most simply by comparing the natural motion

with which one tosses a stone with one that is incorrect and

not to the purpose, for example, one with an artificially ex­

tended or a stiffly and angularly held arm. In the latter

we see and feel immediately that a correct swing is impossible

and that no practical effect can be achieved. In a tossing

motion correctly introduced and taking place without inter­

ference, we sense clearly that the very considerable energy

applied only acts for a moment and only requires a momentarily

strong muscular action. We sense further that this strong

temporary action races through the arm from shoulder to hand,

that the muscles of the shoulder, upper arm, forearm, etc.

are clearly gripped in turn by the energy of the swing (69).

Immediately afterward, however, passivity occurs once again.

The more far-reaching the swing, the more energetic it

is. Therefore, the greatest velocity is reached when the

tossing motion is executed from a position with the arm sus­

pended next to the torso. The arm is thrown up to a certain

height above the key (falling height) and passes from an

ascending motion directly into a descending one while re­

t~ining the swing.

Page 156: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

150

85. Above (54), the objection that the swinging motion is

a rough, forcible action contrary to the nature of piano

playing was rejected. Whoever makes this objection cannot

be clear on how often he has utilized the swing himself in

everyday playing, and how often he still uses it. Tender­

hearted souls may not be able to rid themselves of a certain

prejudice against the "throw," but nothing justifies this

prejudice. The great:_ advantage of the ~Vi!.~ .is th§. ex~ra­

ordinari!.z delic~ capacit:( to gradat~ it~ actiqg and the

Q.Q.SSibilit!_~ of the mos~ extensive shadi!l8_ ~ to the passive

£Qgditio~ £{ the £ther ~~cles. We can check even the most

powerful blow of the fist in the last moment right over the

object to be struck. What is possible with such a crude action

can naturally be achieved much more easily with a delicate,

accurately evaluated movement, whose effect is known from the

beginning.

86. I should like here to refute the erroneous opinion that

in weighting for playing a new, very different and theoreti­

cally conceived condition of the arm is under consideration.

Weighting for playing only represents a special case, applied

to the piano, of a general, legitimate phenomenon of muscular

relaxation which has always been apparent to an attentive

observer in art and also in daily life wherever power and grace

are manifest. One becomes aware of the character of a movement

expressing grace or dignity as soon as he desires to imitate a

Page 157: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

151

graceful or dignified motion. To a high degree, the moving

limb is given over to weight during the entire duration of

the motion. Any active muscular contraction working against

the weight would alter the form of the motion, interrupt its

course and disturb the original expression.

Every rider, tumbler, fencer, etc. knows that "letting

go" is the "trick .. " If one has understood the nature of a

relaxed muscular condition, with the minimum of necessary

muscle action for the next motion, whatever it may be, with

continual readiness to follow every slightest impulse, he

will also grasp that all skillful, secure, technically per­

fect, finished, graceful, expressive, assured motions must

have relaxation and passive weighting as a prerequisite. We

have arrived here at a point where the areas of aesthetics

and physiological mechanics meet, where empirically discovered

standards for beauty find their explanation in muscle physi­

ology. For the common essence of these motions, accomplished

with the least expenditure of energy, is the participation of

just as few muscles as is absolutely necessary for accomplish­

ing the task.

As to the physiological-technical side of these motions,

it was already shown (38 and 48) that skill and its perfection

consist in the elimination of all superfluous and excessive

accompanying motions of the beginner and, on the other side,

the selection of purposeful muscular actions. Even if practice

Page 158: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

152

here as everywhere starts out from the maximum, from excess,

natural disposition permits talent to begin far below the

average maximum and relatively close to the level to be fi­

nally obtained only through adaptation and conservation of

energy. Movements in which excess power and muscular effort

have not yet been polished away and in which disrupting ac­

companying motions have not yet been eliminated give the

well-known angular, stiff, awkward, wooden, clumsy impression.

Purposefulness can be recognized immediately in skillful,

smooth, finished, polished motion. It has an effect just as

aesthetically perfect and harmonious as the motions themselves

are graceful.

Logically, finger technique at the piano must make an

aesthetically unsatisfactory, forced, angular impression--the

freely swinging way of playing, however, a pleasant, smooth

and s~illful one. The listener may judge according to his

own observation if this is the case. To use a convenient com­

parison, one can say that finger technique is related to the

natural attack as foot gymnastics of the ballerina is to the

actual dance.

Obeying natural laws, the body chooses of itself to use

weighting for playing, but performers have, from some extra­

neous motive, unfortunately always worked against it with

their muscles. Only great artistscan keep free of this ten­

dency. One must be fair and admit that the inadequacies of

Page 159: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

153

tl1e instrur:1e!1t bear ti:1~ chief bla~2 fo:: ·~::.:..s.

key apparatus, consisting of endless, u~iform keys) favors

continual regression i:1.i:o the sa~ne e:.-rors, even r:i-:ou;::h these

errors seem to have been just elimin2ted.

Through the S\Jing hTe have at o~:.- disposal a much zreater

difference between • • .. 'I!

p:t.a:"~:L s s :.mo ana f C·":.. .. tiS S i :'~~0

range of gradation than can be proc>..:cc;'-~ ' oy

We gain thereby a considerable inc::-eas·2

as

an incomparably greater musical e.2fec::. The s:i..ngi<:g, full-

bocied quality of the playing is ac~ieved by greater tonal

intensity and oore gradation of

this intensity. Besides, an is~~oved, ~echanically favo~ed

l t . h. . , ~· ega o :t.s ac L:t.evea oy ~ne of

One of the most difficult proble~s o~ physiological

mechanics is to determine composite r::otions o Z the limb made

up of many stages and infinitely varied in respect to energy

and velocity. It is impossible to simple fonn~las for

gradations of power in the attack. T;Je must resort to :;encral

physiological considerations. Lhe player must proceed from

a condition of rest, as a more suitable object for observa-

tion, in order to make clear to himself the gradations of his

swinging attack. Only in this condition are the differences

capable of being investi3ated or perceived, T.Jhi.le, :.r:. co:.--:.trast,

Page 160: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

154

the processes in the musculature du~ing the swing escape pre-

cise observation. As regards the selection of applicable

degrees of strength in the attack, all levels fro~ zero to

playing weight come into conside~ation. The applicable desrees

of muscular contraction in the sw!nging attack lie only within

the limits of these t"vo v:eightings. :-~uscular action beyond

playing weight up to maxinmm vJeighting may occur only momen-

tarily. The path to maximum 'iveighting would inevitably lead

back to wrong technique because of the muscular effort in-

valved. attack are produced by in-

crease in velocity vJith the same \.·Jeight (as in \.veigh::ing for

playing) and by increase in the arc, the extent of "reaching

Out fl of 1-'f--•. -:. SW~ • .,n-lncr "'·rr l''"SS (C.r;) ' -... - l.ue;,"'- -:;; ..... .., ··•·- , u V •

88. As far as the direction of the svJinging art::~ motion is

concerned, 1.vi th the delicate adj-Js tabili ty of the rounded heads

in the joint of the upper arm (54) and v:ith the characteristic

arrangement of the muscle fibres coiled around the upper arm

on all sides, the direction is, one might say, a ~atter of

complete indifference. The motion is accomplished 1.vith equal

ease in all directions, with eve17 angle and usually with

longitudinal rotation of the upper arm. Striking any desired

key with any desired finger can be achieved in the most accu-

rate and secure way, and finally without the control of the

sense of sight by practicing the distances. Motion in an

absolutely straight line does not occur at all; it will always

Page 161: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

155

take place in a curve, t:1e form and curvature being deter-

mined by the position and succession of the keys (89).

The upper ar>:n motion deterr:Jines, hovJever, only the basic

form of the curve described by the hand. As a moving, swing-

ing mass the arm is, in fact, a pendulum, and one compounded

by several interpolated pivots. If ue leave the suspension

of the shoulder structure on the breast bone out of considera-

tion, since the shoulder joint is not swoordinate to the will,

we have, beside second point of suspen-

sion and rotation in the elbow joint and still more such points

in the vrrist, metacarpal and fin2e~ joints.

89. A co~?licated curve forw arises from the several points

Or~ ro+-- t--io""' o,... susn'"·ns.:; on r..:ol;::;_"":<_·: i 1luc:t-rat"'s as a "roundr=>d '-c~~.._ '" - ' i<:: ~ • -~ ~-- --- -- ~ ~

motion 11 a ldnd of curve to-vmrd the keyboard (p. 24). She

neglects, however, to of~er us any explanation.

Hi-:::hout rotation, no curve. Those shmvn by Caland are

of another kind, explicable by fixation--but wrong. Clark's

cu:::· ,:es are observed correctly but explained incorrectly, ac-

cording to physiology. The source of the curves is not the

torsion of all joints along the longitudinal axis of each

skeletal part, but rotation from the upper and especially the

forearm. Those traced from a point of the wrist, noted by

T. Bandmann (op. cit.) are correct on the whole. Tney are

executed by the wrist and have natural phrasing as the desired

effect.

Page 162: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

156

It is best to make the attac~ing curve clenr by means

of a com~onplace illustration. Perform an extensive stirring

motion in the air at approximately chest level and v1ith pm·Jer-

ful participation oi the whole arm and shoulder. This r.tove-

ment gives a picture of compound, complementary rotation in

the individual limbs. If one then performs the stirring mo-

tion with a supporting fingertip as a fi~ pivotal point

(turning finger or axis finger), he has the basic form of

attacking curve repeated in countless variations according

to the r::usical passage. The curves so originating are deter-

mined by the length of the arm, t~1e position of tl:.e key used

as the turning point c.:-:.d the distar-Lce of the out\·,mrd reach

for ' . tne S'i.•ll.ng. The lines of the curves are described in the

air by a~y desired point of the ann. Those of the fingers

and hand can be imagined as the smallest arcs projected on

the keyboard. Through practice c:md adaptation the distance

becomes ever shorter, the curves SQaller, and energy and time

are spared. Thus a certain basic foru1 of curve can be ascer-

tained for every ann and for every passage. Intuition can

aid the learning process in this. One must, however, guard

against deriving new, restrictive rules from the curve forms

thus discovered. It should not be forgotten that in learning

technique the body does everything better and more correctly

by its own arrangement than any attempt at direction can pos-

sibly teach.

Page 163: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

157

The COn ti!1UOUS ::10 tion, the j Oi':1in[; 0 f c:1.e CU:CV2S, t.:J.~(CS

place through the rolling action of pronation or s~oination

on the -v;heel formed by the five fingers (72), throu~h the fall

from one finger to the next. The "supporting fingers 11 take

on a considerably different and more extensive kinetic import-

ance than before; they become typical rotating fingers or axis

fingers on which the arm mass momentarily rests and then swings

along further. The passive relaxed condition provides that,

in the continuous motion of the swing, a slitht impulse on

the labile arm mass suffices to throH the hand with a rolling

action from one finger to the next. The active passing under ----- -

of the thumb becorr~cs not only superfluous, it is to be elirni-

nated as a disturbing muscle action. The sup()orting fing·ers

keep the key depressed for legato and tenuto with the slightest

tension conceivable. They are ready at any moment to change

from supporting fingers to rotating fi~gers. It can be said,

to sum up, that no curve is possible wit~out rotation.

90. Thus forearm rotation is the keystone, as it were, of

a system of motion constructed on physiologica~-- principles.

Always used unconsciously by good players, since no co-ordinated

motion of attack is conceivable without it, rotation is in a

position to suppress the unnatural technique vJhich trains fin-

gers to be individual hammers and to free the weak musculature

of the hand from enforced over-exertion, if only it is con-

sciously and systematically used and correctly taught. Prob-

ably the sharpest contrast to former opinion lies just in this

Page 164: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

158

It is here

that resistance of petrified trad~tion will persevere most

tenaciously.

The conclusion is this: no sto?ping or fixation at any

time; smooth, fluid motion always. r-""1~ • .. ,_ ~ •

!~ere 1s no 1n~errup~1on,

no stands till, no 11 holding 11 in the a1.r.

.. ,.. .... i- , even 1r ~emporary, ~enas toward slug0ishness and implies a

cessation of motion. It is reprehensible to deceive students

about the essence of piano technique, about swinging, con-

tinuous motion by showin3 them static pictures and illustra-

tions of poses and positions. The only possible sethod of

representa tic:.-~ ':·;o:1ld be: t~·~e use of motion pictures.

91. T'ne T,7-:--: c ,_ .... \ ..., -u \...) has nothing

more to this continuous motion than to adapt to the

current need. For individual types of attack, chiefly stac-

cato, hand mass has been used by many as a swung, tossed

weight, and correspondingly correctly taught. The transfer

of swinging motion also to the hand is more difficult than

the rotating motion, fo:= t:1e rcasor~s given above (72). ?or

some tasks of technique, ~owever, it is indispensable. Active

which more or less impairs a fre~ ~w~.

Page 165: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

159

l r/·b · t• , ' ' ' . ~ rat~n.:; mo ~ons, r:;an~ea oy a~ elevated and character-

:tstic musical effect, fo:. ... ·::; a small but i::1?ortant part of the

motions in technique . .J .Z:-:o~-r~1 fo::- 2 long time in musical

language as vi!2_'f_ato, they a:ce not

correctly understood at all, as a glance at the D.p;J:Copriate

literature reveals. Up to now, they were difficult to teach

and to imitate for the simple reason that the mechanical laws

governing them "tvere not correctly zrasped.

''Vibration consists of the

of the same r:1otion. Tl1e r.umh21.4 of :C2[)2tit:Lons vari2s beti:Jeen

six and tHelvc: ?er second. There is no v2locity exceeding

t 1 ,... j- "' 1 .. _,_'1 , • , ·+- , 1. . ,_ He ve. 1~0~ e:.ve:ry nea ::ny man--p.s. ... no.;.og:tca-'- t..remo ~ng ~s no'-

considered here--is able to achieve this vibration with equal

ease. There are countless gradatio~s of innate disposition.

One person is never successful d2spite many attempts and much

practice in achieving t:;.e velocity and facility desired by

the musical ear. The other succeeds ,,,i thout difficulty on

the first attempt. Thus, assuming a certain disposition,

vibration is possible in all joints. However, the mechanical

structure of the joints is suited for it in very different

degrees. In this connection, joints disposed favorably or

less favorably to vibration can be distinguished according

to the construction of the J.:Oint and the muscles beloncrino b 0

3The following sta~ements on vibrating motion are taken from an article of the same name by the author which appeared in Mus il92.§l~do..E._<?._g_:hs.s..b..~ll ~~~ e t_ t:..'=..~~' 19 0 5. Those interested ':vi ll find still further material there.

Page 166: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

to it and accor~in3 to size of tho

cnn easily prove to ~imsclf that vibration of a

160

One

c· .L.J..n~er--

rapid, successive motions of diffe~e~t fin2e~s does not ---------- ......

belong to vibration--is ~uch more difficult and can be much

less rapidly executed than that of th2 h::ind or Hholc arrn.

The short parts of th2 finger 'tvhich are set in motion by long

tendons running over several joints are normally completely

incapable of rapid vibrating motions and especially of those

with sufficient speed and power to be of technical use. To

go through c:.ll ::he individual joir·.ts l·iould lcc:;.d too far afield;

only those most i~r:-;:;or::2nt for inst:.:.1.::n2ntal tec:-.nicue will be

taken into consideration.

11 The hand reveals conditions incor:1parably more favorable

in comparison to the parts of tl:.e finger. Its relatively

heavy mass can easily .. :::: placed in vibrating, alternately

flexing and extending motion. If one performs an experiment

in hand vibration and intensifies its power and extent, he

notices the inc~easing participation of the whole arm up to

the trunk. This observation is of zreat physiological impor-

tance. There is no isolated motion of a single joint. All

joints of the arm ahvays participate in every, even the small-

est, movement of a part. In the elbow, also, a vibrating,

alternately flexing and extencing motion can be achieved.

In the shoulder joint such a motion can be accomplished with

the whole arm; here too, all other joints between the shoulder

Page 167: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

161

and fingertips partici~ate. Therefore, the hand tremolo in

£~~no Ql~l~ cannot be sharply differentiated from that of

the Hhole arm. Tl':.e di.::ferences are v:-'.ly quantitative and

determined solely ;:;y ·::l;e ~;::..zc= of t::e: :-:..=:ss set in motion.

"Forea~ rota~i2n_, \·lith the hand participating, has a

special capacity for swinging and a dis?osition for vibrating

motion. As is t-Jell kno\,m., this rotation consists of a turn­

ing of the radius on the ulna along a longitudinal or rota­

tional axis running from the cl bm·J to the wrist. The extra­

ordinarily easy mobility in forea1~ rotation is due to the

favorable mechanical arrangement of the joints and ~uscles

involved in it. .:\ltl'.ough it has ahvays had the misfortune

of being confused by musicians ui th \<7ris t :-r:.otion, \vi th which

it has nothing to do, every pianist presumably knows of it,

since he applies it often enouzh i:::1 its pure form as an octave

tremolo. The position of the ha::.-.d in relation to the forearm

is not important. It can be (reo~~ flexed or extended as de­

sired. This tremolo can naturally be= executed in intervals

other than the octave. Eany pianists use the E_g_ta~_ion !_rill

from the forearm with quiet fingers (thumb and middle finger,

for instance) in contrast to the t~;vo- finger trill in which

two fingers are alternately lifted (extended) and lmvered

( flexc=d).

"Another vibrating motion at the piano belongs more to

virtuoso technique and makes a brilliant effect, namely, rapid

Page 168: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

1,..? 0-

octave passages. These 'lightnin~ octaves' are outside of

the framework of natural niano technicu.e because of the enor------- . mous expenditure of ener2y required and the extreme and pro-

longed extended position of the fingers. The great expendi-

ture of energy can be supplied only from the shoulder joint

by means of the 'tvhole arm mass. It der.1ands, alone: with the u

extension of fingers, that the 'ivholc r::usculature of the arm

participate to the highest degree in t~e vibrating motion.

Although the tremolo Hith forearm rotation is easily under-

stood and can be taught and learned within the limits of the

individual natural disposition as soon as the separation of

the Yrrist from rotation is once graspeds the vibrating octave

passage can be learned only by gradual, appropriate, step-by-

step training. It must first be p~acticed 'in one spot,' on

one and the same pair of keys before soing on to consecutive

octaves. At first, only a fetv of these can be achieved and

gradually more, in longer passa5es.

"The inner process in vibrating r.1ove::-:ents is such that

muscular contractions following each other in rapid succession

allow no tine for relaxation. For this reason a kind of con-

vulsive stiffening arises. This shortcoming is tied up more

or less with every vibration and cannot be completely eliminated.

Hmvever, training which becomes more and more adapted to the

motion eliminates a large portion of the initially great stiff­

ness. With time and increased practice the muscle tension

Page 169: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

163

diminishes. But it always persists, to a certain degree,

because it reoresents the essence of vibration. ?rom all of ' -----~-- --- -----

this can be deduced that the octave vibrato, fortunately for

the art of piano playing, represents ~othing more than an over-

ripe fruit of virtuosity and means, for piano technique, a

regression into the errors of the old gymnastics, unnatural

muscular tension, and stiffness.

"The ability to repeat one and the same motion in rapid

succession varies widely among ihdividuals. A certain innate

disposition toward it is required to execute quick vibrating

motions evenly. Vibrating, shaking motion is, in theory,

possible for every joint. The r:1ass of the part of the limb

to be moved, hot-Jever, and the structure of the joint and its

muscles cause variations similar to those occurring above in.

the S\vinging motion. Thus, the forearm is especially equipped

for vibrating motion (72); in second place is the wrist. Fin-

gers lack this capacity. The mo~ion is considerably more dif-

ficul t for the 'tvhole arm from the shoulder joint. Vibratino-c~

forearm flexing does not enter into consideration in piano

playing. Here, too, this proposition is valid: the less mus-

cular action that must be used, the freer and quicker the

vibrating, shaking motion."--

92. The physiological 'tvorking out of piano technique, attempted

here along only general lines and vrlthout further consideration

of technical details, promises to·have a certain influence on

Page 170: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

164

the future of pi.:::mo

progress in the instrument \·Jill be r.:.:::.de considerably

easier th~c~~h ~t) it will act all t~2 ~ore li~e ~ thorn in

the side o: the player \vho h.8s

tics.

for the untalented. 'VJhat a mass of insuf:ici_e:ntly talcl-:te:d

pupils are dragged year after year through the: conservatories!

r,._JI1at a host of inadequately trained people (. :;dicate themselves

continually to • t-' • . , , th wl~n pltlaote, you -

ful beginners! If all the above elements of erroneous tech-

nique, \·1:-:ich hang li:~e a lead \·Jeigl':t on art as ·1 .. Jell .:.~ on the

music profession, could be cast off, great progress \·JOuld be

made. '!'"'\ , .. '1-, , .. - t 1 • .. • • '

~ouotless cue :ce:s~-:ap~ng o~ e.::nn:.que accora1.ng co pnys-

iological principles .. "'t "I

';.'JJ..l..l.. cont::~ b-wte co:1.siderably to frighten-

ing away the untalented. ?or it requires, to a far greater

extent than dull, mechanical practice, careful self-observa-

tion, inner participation and ge~uine artistic understanding

(58) of the norr.:1al relationship b2t\-:reen technique and ousic.

~.Je defined technique as an adaptatio:1 to art. It fol-

lows, then, of itself that true and prir,:a.ry ·technique is al-

ways that which obeys natural Ls:cvs, Hherc:as former technique

represents a system artificially, unn&turally and arbitrarily

constructed. v·le must retur..'1 to the primary lm,7s; then all

arbitrary limitations will disappear of themselves.4

4compare Grunsky, "Klavier und musikalische 't·Jart, Nos. 3 and 4 •.

:<uns t-

Page 171: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

165

Piano instructors and represent:1tives of ::-:;ymnastic

t;.::chnique at musical institutions ~·lill raise strenuous ob-

jection to the physiological norms of piano playing in far

greater measure than the large nu:-::her of nlavers. ' J

nowever,

it is just these institutions v1hic~ should take: the lead.

tfnat conservatory administration o£ today is far-sighted

enough to include physiological instruction by a prof.::ssional

physiologist in the curriculum? If the piano-teachin3 pro-

fession desires to advance itself socially with full right,

then it must assume its responsibilities and prove to the

world that it desires to b.:: free of prejudice, to broaden its

technical knowledge and to beco~e better acquainted than

before with related fields of knowledge.

Page 172: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

CE ... ~PTER II

A SYNTHESIS AND AN EVALUATION

Steinhausen's book is obviously not & nethod in the

sense that the older exercise books of Czerny, Gerner, Tausig

and others were. Its aim is not to suggest a series of prac­

tical studies but rather to get at t:1e roots of the technical

problem. It is not nearly so int2::.:2sted in doing something

as it is in finding out how it is done, or, better, how it

is done properly.

In reading Steinhaus en's bco:::~ o:1.e is struck immediately

with the novelty of this ne\v The old axiomatic in-

sistence on finger exercises ~.vhich ah..;ays resulted only in

the invention of new patterns is given up in favor of the more

relevant search for the bases of technique. Steinhausen him­

self suggests that a practical nethod, in the sense of the

well-known methods of the past, must yet be worked out, "tvith

his discoveries as a basis ( p. 16). He argues, and vvi th un-

doubted correctness, that all too much emphasis has been

placed on mechanical repetition of finger patterns, vJith

little regard for the manner of their execution. His approach

may be termed scientific in that it recognizes the need, first

of all, for a clear understanding of the nature of the ins·::ru-

ment and, secondly, for a technique taking this nature in~o

166

Page 173: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

167

account. There can oe little question that this approach has

b:'m evident in every significant b~o:< on technique l.vritten

since Steinhause:::' s ~::o::..·k.

The principal defect in Stei~~a~se:::'s boo~ is that it

is almost exclusively neg~tive. co::rp let ely

natural that this should be the C2.S2. r~·:-:.e old st::::::_ctu::ces and

accepted principles obviously required a thorough overhauling,

and, as is often true in cases ., •J . , • • t L~~e ~nLs, sweep~ng ou the

Old llm;t e; 11C,.,., e.; ce~·'">'1 P~. cen II lu.J- ......, • ,,, - ..Lo .. J l..i. ....... J.. .W\.....o.J ' as S ::cd.r:hausen says, is pref-

It is regrettable that

Steinhause:1 Has in no position musically to suggest a construe-

tive and practical approach to the problem. For this he offers

his 0~1 apologies (see above, p. 16). The musician reading

his book is apt to return. to the old methods merely because

Steinhausen offers him so little to do and so much to avoid.

It is better to do something, thin~~s the musician, than to

be paralyzed with endless prohibitions.

It is beyond question that Steinhausen's work and the

work of his contemporaries stimulated a totally net<.r examina­

tion of the very foundation of piano pedagogy. Reactions were

many but \vere now always accompanied by more-or-less scientific

verification. Some of these new approaches will be mentioned

in the following chapter. Gone 1.-vere the days of unsupported

theories--theories accepted and put into practice by countless

generations of pia~ists.

Page 174: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

On

wori( is that he recog~izcci,

musicians, that scienfif:Lc exao.in,c=;.·::ic:'l CC',.n O';""li.Y go so f:::..r in

the vlorld of -... _.;_ C:..l... l,.,... ir1to

elaborate anato~~cal and physiolo . . '

c.:.:.. s c·:_.~ 3 E: ::._c~:-~ s • :-Ii s ex.-

. . . ~ . ' ]. . ., . ' . . . pcr~er.ce as c. p~1.ys:..c_o3l.s~ nas 00\7:... .. cusi.)' .:.cc: ~--..~-·~-.1 ~co th2 con-

elusion that it is an impossible de~~nd to expect conscious

control over r:-n.1scles.

not

mus culc:r &ctic:.::.

t . . 1 ' • .. .. .._.., " "l .. ,.,_ ~ ~ t mo ~on 1.s ae::el.t.t:Lnea. b)r Ln.e r~tus:_c2.l. ~:ecesSJ...L.Y, aric .c.e pu s

primary ez:phasis on co::-.ce~1tratic:-. d .. re:c:cecl ·::oHard the musical

objec·t, ~~l'lile lettir1g tl1.e ~nusc~lt;.r c:ct::.c~i talce care of it-

self (see above, p. 11).

significant concepts in all

musicians ought to bear clearly i:::'i r::irrd. Technique cannot be

divorced

musical. It is corJfortit'Lc_,. for all ryerfo!.-mers to knoH that _, L

they have been confirmed in this. , their ohn intuitiv2 suppo-

sition, by or.c who is primarily a scientist.

Following is a summary of the most it:lpor·::ant • ... .c po2.n~.-s o.:..

Steinhausen c s vlo:t~k.

Of Steinhausen 1 s statements in sc:::-ve

chiefly to outline the material, the following appear

in Pi~r:() fc rtc~

Page 175: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

169

significc.nt: 1) that r.:.usicians are not or have not bce:n sue-

cessful in establishing valid bc.ses for technique; and 2) that

the nature of le&~to is related to dynamics.

The first statement Steinhausen proves in a~ oblique

fashion. Obviously, great pianists of the past have been

brought up on traditional finger exercises. Docs this mean

that their excellence is due to such training? Steinhausen

answers, 11 No. u In itself this ans\ver is completely arbi-

trary, but Steinhausen points out that the playing of great

artists is not and never has been modeled on school tradi-

tion. He concludes, then, that the inherent o-reatncss of 0

individual artists has caused the~ to discard traditional

approaches and, consequen~ly, the restrictions vlhich hamper

the less gifted in their efforts. They have thus achieved

their playing technique in spite of, and not as a consequence

of, the old methods. Their success is proportional to the

degree to which they have refuted the principles of their

early training. The proof of this thesis is based mainly on

observation. To Steinhausen it is obvious that all great

pianists use the Hhole apparatus of the torso, shoulder and

arm. T\vO questions remain unansvJered, however. To Hhat ex-

tent are the fingers of artists, trained in the old methods,

useful or even indispensable tools in the larger motion?

To what extent is the co-operation of large muscles discern-

ible from without?

Page 176: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

170

In answer to the first question . ' r:nere can be no doubt

as to where Steinhausen stands. :-le is against isolated fin-

ger exercise. He thinks that any such study will necessarily

lose itself in detail and lead to inte~ference with the large

rr.otion. No reader of his book can escape this conclusion in

spite of the fact that Steinhausen says,

It is apparent that "slight" activity is not sufficient to

require special drill, but that it is a sort of natural out-

come of the proper use of larger r:mscles. The other use of

fingers, apart from this directing activity, is the 'l.vork of

supporting the weight of the arm. Steinhausen's concept is

that the weight rests passively on the fingertips when not

being swung to the next position. This is t".: . .::; condition to

which one returns "ever again." (See above, p. 141.) Now,

however true the feeling of passivity in this position may

be in the arm, the effort required of the fingers to support

such a weight is hardly minimal. To play with such arm tveight

resting continually on the fingers Hould require very strong

fingers indeed. Many teachers recommend such a playing con­

dition for strengthening finger muscles, especially the flexors.

Although Steinhausen is principally against the training of

Page 177: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

171

the extensor muscles, he is nonetheless also opposed to the

c .~rcising of flexors. I~ is paradoxical, then, that he has

struck upon one of the most effective methods for such exer-

cise. It might be ~otcd here that this pl~ying condition,

that of passive of objec-

tion to Steinhauser ... ' s proposals. i~atthay deli ve:cs a strong

attack against it. 2 In fact, Matthay's whole system is built

up with a consciously expressed dread of 11 key-bedding,n Matthay's

term for passive 'deightin.z. Matthay is supported in this by

V..lhiteside It is clear, too, that the schools

of finger training hav<= not died out. T1,v0 physiological stud-

. f . ~ 1es o- ~~porta~ce· and a:most all of the practical methods in

common use e:::·;phasize scc:-~ training. T'he ti.oJO studies ruentioned

do so on the basis of scientific arguments, some of which will

be discussed in the final chapter, but most of the methods do

so on the basis of tradition, largely ignoring the "weight"

schools.

The answer to the question of whether it is really pos­

sible to determine what muscles are being used by observation

from without must be that it is not possible. Matthay specifi-

cally mentions Steinhausen's inability to sense inner muscular

2Tobias Matthay, The Visi~le and Invisible in Pianoforte Tech­nique (London, 1934), p. 9.3.

3Abby ~vbiteside, The Pianist's Hechani .. sm (Nei.v York, 1929), p. 8.

4otto Ortmann, The Physiological ~':<:o::he.:::->ics of Piano Technique (New York, 19 29)and ArnoldSC.~uYtz~~t[:;c i~idclle of-the ?ianfst' s Finger (Chicago, 1936). -- - - ·

Page 178: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

172

action, an inability arising from the fac'!: that he was not

a ryianist. He (Steinhausen) therefore relied on observation

d 1 . 5 an carne to sone erroneous cone us1ons. The matter is dealt

with more conclusively, althoush not specifically, by Ortmann

and Schultz. The large muscles and t\7eight playing may be

used, or used in different ways, vnthout producing ili~Y effect

visible from without. Muscles may be tensed without producing

movement, provided the antagonistic muscles are tensed at the

same t·".:-::e: what appears to be a free arm stroke may not be so

at all, because of the inhibiting action of the opposing mus-

cles. A pianist ~ay fling his arns about with great abandon

without ever producing an arm stroke in Steinhausen's sense.

On the other hand, lack of motion in the arm does not mean

that finger muscles are being used exclusively. Arm vleight

can be used, and most effectively, without ever lifting the

arm. The weight may be used as a base against which the fin­

gers act. \Vhat appears to be pure finger action may really ,._

be arm weight in this case. 0

The second debatable point in Steinhausen's introduction

is that dealing with the nature of legato (see above, p. 10).

5To bias Matthay, Some Commentaries o~,..!.~';. Te~.ching of Pia!_lQ_­forte Technigu~ (Lon<ron:-N"rrr;-p-p-. '+O r: f.

6schultz gives the most thorough treatment of bases of move­ment, and the explanation and evaluation of such bases are the principal studies of his book, The Riddle of the Pianist's Fing~ (Chicago, 1936). The original ioea of having bases-­tor movement probably comes, again, from Hatthay. See The Act of Touch C,Jew York, 1903). ·

Page 179: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

173

Steinhausen proposes the theory that le~~to is based largely

c:1 the production of a sufficient volune of sound. There is

little explanation of this thesis, but, since Steinhausen's

method of attack suggasted in Sec~ion VI is based on the need

for adequ2.~e volu:ne of tone, it :.s hizhly important in the

total pla..'1 of the system. ::-ro other author consul ted in t: .. .:.;

preparation of this thesis mentions such a com1ection betweeen

volume of tone and le?ato. If there is really such a connec-

t -·-&r:d such '1:7ould certainly seem to be the case--then the

need for adequate tonal production becomes much greater and

Steinhausen's methods take on considerab:.e importance. Other

writers mention only the need for control over key release

in order to effect the COTh"'lection of tones. It appears, then,

that Steinhaus en has CO!Y!e uoon a much-ne2lected fact. Host • u

practicing pianists recognize his thesis as valid. Piano tone

dies away very rapidly. Le~ depends on the illusion of

one tone fusing into the next. If the first tone has died

away to such a point that it can no longer be heard above the

accompanying figures, then the illusion of leg~to is destroyed.

This is the effect some teachers describe as "whispering."

Steinhausen thus recognizes a peculiar pianistic necessity-­

one overlooked by all other writers. There can be no really

cantabil~ or legato melody playing ~~thout sufficient strength

in the attack. A singing line cannot be sustained at a ~ian­

issimo volume level.

Page 180: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

174

Leaving the fore~v-ord and proceeding to the main body of

tr:e book, 'tve find that Steinhaus en's concepts can be grouped

under three major headings: 1) relaxation; 2) vJeight; and

3) the nature and object of practice. These areas are those

in which Steinhausen reveals his r:;ost or:~ginal and important

ideas. The reader of Steinhausen's book, however, should

ah.vays bear in mind what Steinhaus en himself says of them:

"First, it should be stressed continually that the 'new' is

~·· ·t new at all. ~-Je have it already. It is only a question

of separating true from false. 11 (See above, p. 16.)

Steinhausen's ideas of relaxation, as well as those of

his followers--Hatthay, Breithaupt, Bandmann, hlhiteside and

others--have undergone 'T:Uch opposition. A careful reading ·

of Steinhaus en 1 s text would, hm.;rever, dispel most of these

arguments. Relaxation in Steinhausen's sense does not mean

a sort of limp-rag technique. Wnat it does mean is the at-

tempt to relax all muscles opposec to the action of the limb

in the intended direction. At the same time he warns against

conscious attention directed toward the muscles themselves

(see above, p. 56}. Here he stresses that the selection of

appropriate muscles is an unconscious procedure. Hmv can the

principle of non-attention toward muscles and relaxation of

antagonistic muscles be reconciled? Steinhausen's answer to

this very pertinent question can be found on pp 57-58 above.

"Freedom to the limbs, let go, do r"ot hold back or fix anxiously,

Page 181: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

175

for the body left to itself finds its ohm \·Jay. • . • 11 It is

~ ""\atter of holding the final purpose, the rr:usical object,

in mind while one learns to let the body take its o~n course

in achieving the goal. Again, as Ste.inhausen says, "If the

attention is diverted, a passive condition of rest occurs in

the muscles of its m·n.1 accord. Dif2ic\.:'!.t:ie.s .s.::-is2, then, when

the attention has to be directed towards practicine, as is

inevitable at first when technical motions are worked out.

The process of un-learning this alertness, which interferes

and controls unnecessarily, is, in reality, an intellectual

procedure. 11 (See above, pp. 62-63.) Thus, antagonistic mus­

cles relax quite naturally when no attention is paid to them.

The attention should be focused initially on the required mo­

tion--not on th2 muscular action involved in that motion--,

and this motion should be determined solely on the basis of

the musical goal. Again and again Steinhausen warns against

any attempt to select muscles consciously; it is an effort

which is not only useless but also leads to stiffening and

tension.

Steinhausen points out an obvious b~t much overlooked

point in pedagogy. Teachers are constantly demanding loose­

ness in the joints without any real conception of how this

looseness might be obtained or even of what it, in actual

fact, is. In the first place, looseness or flexibility in

the joints is not a variable factor. The; corr:.pass of the joint

Page 182: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

176

motion is determined by the surfaces of

the bones concerned. sur:aces can be

altered only in childhood, and, vihc:.n -::l-:ey are, such al tera-

tion results in the flexibility seen, as Steinhausen says,

in "rubber men" (see above, p. 71). It is a fre::kish con-

clition and one not at all suited to p~=~o p~ayin3. In adults

little can be done to alter these surfaces and) consequently,

the range of joint motion. Furthermore, the resistance of

these surfaces, the stability and firmness they afford, is

a positive benefit to technique.

In the second place, what is usually meant by joint ri-

gidity is really a matter of muscular tension. ~~~en asked

to make a joint rigid, the student can obviously do nothing

about the bone structure; he tenses the muscles--both extensors

and flexors--which surround that joint. The balanced pull of

the muscles on all sides of the joint and the bones comprising

it serves to set the joint more firmly and to render it more­

or-less impervious to outside forces. (See above, p. 72.)

Thus, if looseness be desired, it can be achieved only

by relaxation of muscular tension. No amount of bending or

stretching will bring it about. The only exercise which can

be of use in bringing about increased extension in the joints

is that which strengthens the muscles pulling on the bones

concerned. The muscles can be strengthened and exercised;

the joints c~~not be ap~reciably altered.

Page 183: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

177

The point usually attacked in the relaxation technique

is the obvious one that total relaxation would result in no

tone production at all. If all muscles were lax at the mo­

ment of attack every joint 'l.vould give under pressure, and the

arm would fall to the side. The point. is so obvious that it

is a matter of wonder that so many adherents of the old school

could actually believe that this is ..vhat is meant by relaxa­

tion. Steinhausen has certainly given his own defense against

such an attack. "Looseness can be expected only in a condi­

tion of relaxation but never in the moment of attack." (See

above, p. 73.) ·"The technical difficulty is thus in giving

in and letting go at the right point. The begLmer is prone

to stiffen all joints by unnecessary muscular effort." It

is clear that the joints must be firm at the moment of attack,

but only in so far as is absolutely necessary. This condition

must be temporary and the state of relaxation the permanent

condition.

Unfortunately the lasting condition of relaxation which

Steinhausen proposes is that of "passive weighting." (See

above, pp. 138-139.) As pointed out above, such a condition,

far from being relaxing, is exhausting for the finger muscles,

although it can be granted that it relieves the shoulder and

most of the arm muscles. If indulged in extensively, it will

lead, however, to a very sluggish finger technique and a

decided decrease in agility.

Page 184: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

178

Steinhausen is not altogether guiltless of misinterpreting

"C-,-;~ statements oi others in regard to relaxation. On page 145

above he argues against the old test of lifting the arm while

the student is playing or i~~ediately a:ter the attacking mo­

tion. Riemann's statement agrees T.-Jith what Hatthay has to

say in the matter. Steinhausen cla:l.ms t'h.:-1t the test vJil'l. not

work if the hand is held in Riemann's position. The fact is,

however, that it will. Steinhausen says just belo~v, "It is

impossible, however, when the arm carries the hand." This

is not what Riemann said, hotvever. His statement was: ''The

hand is carried by the supporting fingers"--not by the arm.

It is true that if the hand is held by the arm the v1rist will

not give vJhen the arm is struck from beneath. Fu::thermore,

the test in its usual fol.i.-:1 is not concerned with whether the

wrist gives or not, but with vJhether the arm can be easily

lifted. The passive ~veighting of Steinhausen would render

the arm practically immobile, ~vhereas either of the other two

positions suggested above would allow the arm free movement.

It seems that Steinhausen has given up supporting the arm at

the shoulder and elbow in favor of supporting it at the wrist

and by the finger muscles. It is doubtful that such a position

is advantageous.

To repeat once again, Steinhausen's stressing of the

position he calls passive weighting is the major flatv in his

exposition of tech~ique. The technique which is probably

Page 185: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

179

correct -vms even stated by Steinhausen himself. "No stopping

o:: fixation at any time; smooth, fluid motion ah.;ays. There

is no interruption, no standstill, no 'holding' in the air.

Every 'position,' even if temporary, tends toward sluggishness

and implies a cessation of motion." (See above, p. 158.)

It is especially regrettable, then, that Steinhausen saw fit

to refute himself in regard to the "position" of passive

weighting. "Permanent positions and poses, which had to be

pointed out as wrong and not permissible with all other con­

ditions of the musculature (79), are exactly \v:-wt is demanded

of weighting for playing: it should be the ever-recurring

condition of rest and relaxation and, indeed, as long as

required or desired. 11 (See above, p. 147.) It is true that

"zero weighting" cannot be a permanent position either; it

is too tiring for the shoulder muscles. The only solution

to the problem--if we accept the principles of weight play­

ing at all--is to keep motion fluent at all times, so that

every position flmvs easily into the next in such a way that

static positions in any guise are virtually eliminated. Had

Steinhausen recognized the weakness in his passive position,

he would have developed an almost irrefutable theory in re­

gard to relaxation. As it is, this weakness leads him into

other errors, as is inevitable, in regard to weight playing.

These errors will be pointed out in what follows.

Steinhausen begins his discussion of weight and the use

Page 186: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

180

of the large muscles--tHo factors that cannot be separated--

,,_ .':1 proof that -.:·Jeight is: 1) necessary, and 2) preferable

to finger technique. The necessity is caused by the fact that

the piano as manufactured today dem&nds a relatively strong

attack. This is doubtless true, especially when present-day

key resistance is compared with that in use on the harpsichord,

clavichord and the early piano. In addition, it might be men-

tioned that the size of modern concert halls and the litera-

ture for the piano from the nineteenth century omvard both

demand greater tonal volume. The question arises then: is

the contractive power in the finger muscles sufficient for

such volume? The question is some-v:rhat rhetorical. In the

first place, whether one plays with fingers or the whole arm,

weight is always a factor as long as there is gravitational

pull. We may eliminate arm weight by fixation of the arm

muscles? and thereby utilize the muscular strength of the

fingers and, of course, their ~.;eight. Without such fixation,

weight from the arm always comes into play as a base against

which the fingers operate. Sinc_e every action has an equal

and opposite reaction, weight or fixation or pressure must

be used to counteract finger action or such action has no

effect. The mechanics of this are best explained by Schultz.s

7This method is actually proposed by Schultz, The Riddle of the Pianist's Ftnzer (Chicago, 1936).

8rbid.

Page 187: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

181

'i'he third means--pressur.:;;--uses vJ2ight as a factor to -v.rhich

added muscular force.

It is obvious, too, that the contractive power of finger

muscles cannot be used at all in chordal passages. Tne only

kind of for this is that which is

requi::ed to st:pport tl-.c: \;c:ight cor::::Lng f::o:n another source.

Thus to say simply that action in the finger muscles is in-

sufficient overlooks even more basic fc:.ctors. Hmvever, v1ere

one to eliminate arm \veight by fb:::.ing the arm muscles, the

wcdght and force of the finger alone Houl.d certainly not be

sufficient on modern piaaos. It is ha::d to see why such a

fatiguing procedure should be reco:::r:-::ended vJhen arm Height is

so readily available.

The attac!cs on \veight technique are usually due to an

over-sinplified ~.i':.eu of it. Sts:"_;:J::ausc:-! is not guiltless in

this respect. to: 1) the fall,

2) weight transfer, and 3) the stving.

The fall of the weight of tl~e a::-~1. onto the finrers '-'

is

the most obvious use of weight a11.d the one usually thought

of 'tvhen the subject of 'tveight playing is mentioned. Volume

levels would depend, in this case, purely on the extent of

the drop; a higher arm at the beginning of the drop would

produce a louder sound and vice versa. In the simplest fonn

of such vJeight use this technique would demand that the arm

be lifted from the keys for each stroke. A more refined use

Page 188: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

182

of such \veight v1ould allmv the fingers to remain on the keys

::ile the arm is lifted. The \vrist position would have to

be altered, of course. In either case the technique is ob­

viously limited to passages where speed is not a factor, since

weight must be released and recovered for each stroke. This

is the most frequent argument against weight technique. It

is limited to the slowest passages, and the regulation of tonal

levels is dependent on depth of fall, a fall beginning usually

\vith the finger mvay from the key and thus out of direct con­

trol over the key. Usually overlooked in these arguments is

the fact that arm \vG.ight drop, either \vith fingers resting

on the keys or away fro-::1 them, is used almost as a matter of

necessity in all chordal playing. There is no question here

of finger action. The action of weight is often supplemented,

of course, by muscular effort.

The second use of vJeight is often called weight transfer.

1bis concept is insepa~able from the idea of forearm rotation.

In this use the passive vJeight of the m:m is merely rolled

from one finger to the other without finger action. (See

above, pp. 91 and 129.) Steinhausen describes the advantages

of the rolling of weight, the principal advantage supposedly

being one of speed. Steinhausen says, 11 :lotation and the

raising or lifting of fingers are mutually exclusive." (See

above, p. 128.) Steinhausen does not stress the fact suf­

ficiently that the individual fingers must be made to support

Page 189: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

...

183

the weight and that the positioning of fingers is vitally

important to secure equality. On the other hand, if the fin­

gers are not exerted at all, there can be no control over dy­

namics, since the passive weight of the arm remains the same.

It would also be possible with Steinhausen's proposal to pro­

duce no tone at all, if the rolling motion were slow enough.

In general, then, Steinhausen's conception of rotation with

passive weight is altogether too crude in its musical results.

Matthay gives a much more refined and usable application of

rotation technique and demonstrates the necessity and impor­

tance of the action in piano technique. (See below, p. 222.)

Once again it is Steinhausen's concept of passive weighting

that prevents him from seeing the most important aspects of

the rotation technique. As he gives it, it is really only

useful in tremolo figures and partakes, in such figures, more

of the character of swing than of weight transfer. In support

of Steinhausen, however, it is only fair to mention that the

teaching of weight transfer is an invaluable aid in the pres­

entation of legato. It is impossible to produce a TIQrr-~ato

with weight transfer, and the basic concept, modified by par­

tial release of weight and some finger action or swing, forms

the basis of all l~ato melody playing.

TI1e third application of weight in Steinhausen's system

is the one really fundamental to his conception: the use of

the swing (Schwung). As Steinhausen defines it, this is:

Page 190: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

184

II • ...... • r• ,.. ,.._'!-:~ n' le ~~S 0.(: t-".;""~.(~ .::1'"'.._ . .-,...,.,, f'~Offi th()> a svnnc;l.ng mo ... l.on or ._..,.;;;.; v: o r:lct::. ... - _ ~ .... ... -

s>.:>ulder dmm in collabo:cation v1ith a sv:ringing, rotating mo-

tion of the forearm and the swingi~g participation of the hand

and fingers." (see above P 132 ) Had Ste;n·b.ausen investi-, . . . . .....

gated further into the nature of such motion from the pianist's

point of view, he would have doubtless cast aside some of the

ideas of passive weighting which othen.;ise mar his theories.

The reader of Steinhausen's book may be somewhat puzzled as

to just what this motion is. The attempt will be made here

to offer some explanatio~.

Two f~idamental ideas must be kept in mind: l) that the

stdng is a combined moverr.ent utilizing weight and muscular

exertion, and 2) that it should be differ·~ntiated from arm

drop or free falling Height. \•lhat mal(es Steinhausen' s exposi-

tion of the matter confusing is that he initiates the swing

from the passive weight position (although he does not rule

out its initiation from the position of passive suspension).

This is where the difficulty lies. The only motion available

from the passive position is that of rotation--either of the

upper-arm or of the forearrn. If the tveight of the arm is not

lifted there is no distinction between this motion and that

in weight transfer, unless it be a matter of degree, that is,

a matter of a more extensive rotation movement. However, if

the weight of the arm is partially supported at the shoulder

and elbow, then the svnnging motion becomes a reality. The

Page 191: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

185

key may be held do'tvn 'l•lith a minir.mm of weisht, a muscular im-

p·..:..lse given to the upper-arm or foreann, the vJeight partially

released; the resultant attack is truly a swing in -;,rhich all

elements co-operate. A true sv.;ring cannot really be achieved

from the position of passive There must be so:;::e

lifting of the arm, however slight or instantaneous it may

be. Once again the insistence on passive \veighting is Stein-

hausen's error. The S\~ng is, of course, limited in speed,

since the v1eight must be s'tvung for· each stroke. The S'tvinging

motion can be especially useful in intense melodic passages

where a large tonal volume is required. In such passages the

swing downward, sideward and the upward lift become fused into

a circular motion, characterized by the circular or oval shape

of the line described by the 't·lrist. The fluid ease of such

a motion, the absence of any hesitation or inhibition, the

perfect co-ordination and timing of all the various muscular

actions required for it are the hallmarks of a perfected

technique. Steinhausen destroyed the fluidity of the motion

by insisting on stopping in the passive position. Others have

destroyed the fluidity by stopping in the zero-\veighting po-

sition. Furthermore, the S'tvingin3 motion in this sense per-

fectly realizes the capacities and limitations of the instru­

ment. There is adequate volume, produced with a minimum of

effort, capable of any degree of shading, and with no pressure

exerted on the key afte::- the moment of attack--an attacking

Page 192: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

186

motion, therefore, \vhich fulfills all of the requirements

~-~-·:ted by Steinhausen on pp. 135 and 136 above. In addition

the motion flows easily into the position required for rapid

passage work: release

against it as a base.

of arrn v1eight tvith the fingers acting

To conclude: arr.1 drop, \veight transfer,

stving and fingers ag.:linst a Height base co::nprise the basic

motions required of any adequate technique.

Of all Steinhausen's concepts, the one which is most

ar~csting is that of practice as a psycho-physiological pro­

cedure. At the same time, it is this aspect of practice, the

psychological, which has been completely overlooked by almost

all other theories of piano technique. For the musician it

should be one of the most important. The musician, with his

almost universal repugna."lce for n:;atters of anatomy and anatom­

ical nomenclature, can take some comfort in Steinhausen's

writing.

In general, it may be said that the indifference of musi­

cians toward the physical necessities of their art has been

a result of their unwillingness to vulgarize an intellectual

and spiritual procedure wlth physical elements. This view

in itself is doubtless false, since, the human creation being

what it most obviously is, man has no other t·Jay of expressing

himself than through physical means. Tt~is is a natural law

and to overlook it is simply foolish. Such thinking has led,

however, to two important results. By overlooking physical

Page 193: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

187

laws pianists have wandered into stran;e and unnatural 'l.vays

c ~playing--no less 11 physical," of course, than the natural

ways but saved from crudeness by their very perversity. Over­

looking physical elements in musical pursuits thus leads also

to a peculiar affliction sornetit:1es c.:.<.llcd 1"::-rlshful hearing."

w~at is heard in the mind bears little or ~o resemblance to

what is heard from the instrument itself because there is no

physical link between that imagined and that produced. The

second result goes a step farther. Once the spiritual and

the physical are completely divorced, then the vmy is open

to a one-sided, false and purposeless cultivation of the

physical. This is no more natural -.:han overlooking the phys­

ical. VJith the control of the intelligence gone a reasonable

pursuit of technical ends is no longer possible. This is "Vlhat

·Steinhaus en alludes to when speaking of "Vlitless gymnastics.

He is obviously reacting against the finger gymnastics prac­

ticed so assiduously in his day and exaggerates the evils of

such gymnastics. It is true that most of this gymnastic exer­

cise was falsely directed and was thus to be deplored. Stein­

hausen offers, however, no real substitute. If there is to

be weight playing, then there must be forms of exercise which

lead towards this goal. In addition many hands must be strength­

ened in order to support the weight thus used. Exercise of

the muscles which hold the fingers apart, the adductors, is

probably the most neglected side of such strengthening.

Page 194: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

188

Steinhausen's precept that all exercise must be done at the

' ·?board should probably be heeded, since divorcing technical

from musical elements leads usually to unfortunate results.

In all exercise there must be the psycho-

logical function of technique is icp~irecl.

Tne comfort which musicians can derive fro~ Steinhausen's

conclusions is involved primarily ~.vith physiology. Stein­

hausen demonstrates that anatomical knowledge is of little

use in perfecting technique. (See above, pp. 58 ff.) First-

ly, the conscious selection of muscles is a virtual impossi-

bility. Secondly, the reciprocal relationship of muscles

with each other and the consequent muscular adjustments are

too complex to be controlled consciously. Thirdly, the brain

has the means for learnins physical motion independent of con-

scious control --the process knmm as adaptation. To the

musician this means that only the goal or aim of the motion

can be under conscious direction, and this should be the es­

sence of practice. The attention must be directed towards

the ultimate musical purpose and with the greatest possible

alertness. Practice thus becomes a process of adaptation-­

repetition until the motion performed is executed 'tvith the

least possible effort and is perfectly adapted to the nrusical

goal. As Steinhausen points out, this process is not less

intellectual than conscious control. The brain is still the

organ involved fundamentally but not in a conscious way. The

Page 195: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

189

cor.scious activity of the brain is involved in the conception

o~ the musical goal desired and in checking the results of

the physical motion against this conception. The body is

left to its own activity guided by the subconscious centers

which integrate muscular action into a physiological tmole.

In simpler terms this means that a desired leap fro:n

cl to c4 cannot be achieved by ~nlling muscles a, x, y and z

into action in just the right proportions. Such an action

. __ ;: .:.chieved by ~lling the movement itself, not the muscular

action. As Steinhausen demonstrates, the successful comple­

tion of any action is cependent upon the sum of all previous

experience. (See ~bove, p. 43.) By this is meant not only

the motions practiced for piano playing but also the infinitely

vast number of motions attempted and mastered in a thousand

varied activities from childhood on. The reservoir of expe-

rience is subconscious and fortlli1ately so, since active con-

trol of it ~vould be an impossible task. To despise such sub­

conscious activity as non-intellectual is nonsense. The

process is one of the brain and therefore no less intellectual

than any other such process. Furthermore, the point cannot

really be argued. Such activity is a fact and must be recog­

nized as such.

From the above considerations a fundamental conclusion

can be dra\-m. As Steinhaus en says, "we can teach the body

nothing; we can only lean1 from it." (See above, p. 4.)

Page 196: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

190

Thus seen from the psycho-physiological side, practice is a

?::.:..:cess of acquiring habits of motion. The attention must

be continually directed towards the aim or musical object of

the motion. This presupposes a mental ideal of \vhat that

musical object should be. ~~1en practice is so directed it

reaches its highest level. It is a combination of the pre­

liminary formation of absolute musical ideals and a recog­

nition of the proper and ordered position of the physical.

What must be guarded against is the arbitrary placing of any

artificial hindrances in the path of the acquisition of natu­

ral physical habits. No attempt should be made to control

that which by nature is subconscious.

In conclusion, the areas discussed significantly by

Steinhausen may be enumerated as follows:

1) the true nature of the instrument, its physical limi-

tations and its possibilities; •

2) the meaning of relaxation and looseness;

3) the use of weight, swing and rotation; and

4) the essence of practice as a psycho-physiological

procedure, and the important consequences of this

recognition.

In these four areas Steinhausen made statements of great

novelty and practicability. There can be little doubt that

he was one of the first to think along such lines. Wnatever

the limitations of his thought, the important considerations

Page 197: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

191

rema.in true today. Little of v1hat hz.d been -vr.citten before

v- what has been written since, could lay clain in such

measure to the qualities of logical exposition, clear rec-

ognition of facts, freedom from prejt.:dice and absence of

incomprehensible technical 4- • , ... erm~nOJ..02Y· It is for these

qualities, as well as for the revolutionary conclusions to

which adherence to such qualities led, that Steinhausen's

work should be read and respected.

Page 198: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

CHAPTER III

SOME COMPA..O..ISO~S t-liTH OTHER METP.ODS

The comparison of Steinhauser.' s "i:o-rk uith th.::t of others

in the field of piano technique poses certain difficulties.

Chief among these is the fact that the approach of Steinhausen

does not correspond with the approaches found in other works.

Steinhausen, as pointed out above, is pr:i.ncipally concerned

with indicating the more obvious errors in piano technique

current at his time and before. He suggests little in a pos­

itive way. He is not concerned \vith specific pianistic prob­

lems (octaves, trills, double notes, etc.) except as he may

refer to them in passing. Host of the methods written before

that of Steinhausen 111ere concerned primarily with just such

problems. For example, the Bree description of Leschetizky's

method has just a few pages devoted to general physiological

problems and then proceeds to exercises and specific techni­

cal difficulties. 1 This chapter will deal principally with

those aspects of piano technique which correspond with or

are opposed to those discussed by Steinhausen.

Since the older methods, those of Czerny, Germer, and

others,were really exercises and made no attempt to explain

lMalwine Bree, T:'le Lescl'letizk;z Method (Ne't.; York, 1913).

192

Page 199: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

193

the manner in which the exercises should be practiced, they

..; ....... not really be compared to the work of Steinhausen. They

may or may not be played according to St~inhausen•s princi-

ples. There can be little doubt, hm,;;cver, that such exer-

cises were and generally are practiced "'ith fL1gc:r technique

in mind. The attempt is usually made to exercise the fingers

without the participation of the wrist or arm--to Steinhausen

an impossible concept in its very nature. Statements from

three t.;rorks will be considered in establishing the nature of

the gymnastic, finger-drill approach. These works are those

of Ehrlich,2 Kullak,3 and their more recent successor,

Leschetizky. 4

Ehrlich's slight volume was written principally as a

guide to the practice of the Tausig DailY S~udies. A few

comments will suffice to determine its nature. Ehrlich as-

sumes, ~ priori, that exercise of fingers is· a worthwhile

endeavor. From this he proceeds to the idea that the fingers

are best exercised if they are isolated from the rest of the

mechanism. To achieve this isolation he recommends that the

upper-arms be held tightly against the sides and slightly to

the front of the body. This is not advocated as a playing

2H. Ehrlich, Hot'l to Practice on the PianQ_, trans, J. H. Cornell (New York, 190ZJ.-- -- ---

3A. Kullak, Aesthetics of Pianoforte Pla~ing, trans. T. Baker (New York, f90/). -

4M. Bree, The Leschetizkz Methc~ (New York, 1913).

Page 200: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

194

method but as a Hay to insure non-participation of the arms

~d shoulders. The fingers are then to be drilled in the

Tausig exercises with the fingers held high. 5 (By high fin-

gers one usually understands curved fingers ~1ith a low tvrist

and the first bone of the finger dra',·m up so that it fonns

an angle of less than 180 degrees with the back of the hand.)

The ability to contract the extensor muscles to a high degree

is thus assumed to be of importance. Similar drill is viewed

as essential by all of the "finger11 schools. No reason is

really given for this, and it is very difficult to understand

why the high-finger position was ever ascribed any importance

whatsoever. The only argument ever advanced is that the height

of the fingers above the keys determines the amount of tone

produced. In theory, this is, perhaps, correct. In practice,

the difficulty in changing from the contracted extensor mus­

cles required in the lift to the contracted flexor muscles

required in the down"t.;ard thrust vitiates any advantage. It

is also doubtful that any 11high-finger" player has ever achieved

a legato in cantabile passages. Still more disadvantageous is

the psychological difficulty of concentrating on lift when the

entire musical result is focused on the down stroke. The high­

finger attack is, therefore, as Steinhausen agrees, basically

hostile to musical feeling.

The conservative approach, i.e., the position of the rep­

resentatives of the older schools as it appeared after th~

5Ehrlich, QE. cit., p. 11.

Page 201: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

been published, can be suggested by a q~otation tro~ the

work of J. Alfred Johnstone.

"~·Jhether are pm·;er, control 2nd independence to be gained by allov1ing all our hc:Lnd r:t'J.sc1.es to re:-c:ain in their norn.1al condition of 'I.Jea:.::nes s, flabbir~::::;s s and interdependence, and by feebly raising anci droppins

19.5

' f. b . . h. ' , - '"t-eacn ~n~er; or y nract~Cll1CJ; a stro:.-t<?, .1.g,1. uD-.i.l.J:-of each finqer and a forcible dovm-st=:o:~e; a~ t:he sc:me time holdin~ the other fingers motionless, so as to isolate each and detach it from the in~luence of the others c:Ls rr:L:ch as nossible? The very sto.tcm.::r~t:: of the conflict:inQ vi~ws is a sufficient answer to the

,.;:) (

vJho le CfL!2 s ticn. a o

is not a sufficient

stone has not understood the 11 "\·:·ei.ght 11 sehool, or has only cho-

sen to understand its ~est absurd aspect. It is doubtless

true that in the controversy that the publication

of the v10rk.s of Steinl"-.:.s.-'-·~sen ( l S03), Hc;.tth2y ( 1903) and Breit-

haupt (1905) there was tituch nc1!S2nse in the The point is

that Johnstone has not stated c~c conflicting views at all.

Firstly, 11 independence 11 is a co-:1cept

playing advocates. The m~sical goal is control and evenness;

Steinhausen and others think that such control is not a result

of finger independence but of directed Height. 2ven if inde-

pendence is vie\ved as a desirable goal, as it is in a sense by

Steinhausen, it is seen as the result of the elimination of

extraneous motion. This elimination is not achieved by force

6J A J '· ~ T' At f • •'"l.. Ol1...1S ~one, ne nr 0 (London, n.d.), p.~26.-_--

Page 202: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

196

as ~n the finger schools but by relaxation of all non-partici-

Secondly, although the ~veight approach les-

sens the importance of finger strength, it does not rule it

out altogether. Nowhere in Steinhausen's book is ''flabbiness"

of fingers recommended. Indeed, the opposite is true. (See

above, p. 132.) In addition, if the Steinhausen principle

of resting the weight on the fingers is observed, it will lead

to a strengthening of the fingers and especially of the flexor

muscles. Thirdly, Johnstone is obviously interpreting relax­

ation in the absolute sense. The real meaning of relaxation

has been pointed out above, p. 174. Complete relaxation of

finger, arm and shoulder muscles would lead, obviously, to

the production of no sound at all. All joints would be limp

and the arm would fall back to the side. Relaxation as under-

stood in its proper sense means elimination of all muscular

action not directly contributing to the action and a conscious

use of weight and swinging mass in the production of tone.

The best resume of piano methods up to 1861 is probably

contained in a work by Dr. Adolph Xullak. 7 The principal points

of these earlier methods are described, and the reader is given

a good picture of the state of piano playing before the intro­

duction of the weight systems. The principles of piano play­

ing as advocated by Dr. Kullak then follow. In most respects

they are representative of the older schools.

7 Aesthetics • • ••

Page 203: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

197

A term which Dr. I<ullak employs is that of finger

"fall."8 This term reappears in the work of Deppe and is

implied in the writings of Matthay. The finger does not

strike the key but seems to fall into it. It is suooosed ''

to be something other than muscular action in the finger

itself. On the other hand, it is not an arm stroke. There

can be only one explanation. It is obvi~~s that the weight

of the finger itself can produce no tone. If it is not

muscular action in the finger, then, which produces the

tone, it is arm weight. The difficulty for all writers who

had an intuitive understanding of weight technique was that

they did not understand the principle of playing the fingers

against a base of weight and that a perfect co-ordination of

all elements results in almost no visible motion at all.

The finger appears to "fall" into the keys. There can be

little doubt that Deppe and I<ullak had a premonition of what

was meant by weight playing. It is really in the attempt to

define the action that the difficulties arose. One further

departure from the older methods is notable in Dr. I<ullak's

book: a flat finger stroke is recommended for ~ant~bile play­

ing. A flat finger stroke in itself is actually no guarantee

of greater tone or legato connection. Kullak must have in­

tended a forearm stroke and rotation as accompanying motions,

else the ends he desired could not be obtained.

8Kullak, Aesthetic~ .•• , p. 101.

Page 204: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

198

In other respects Kullak is quite conventional. Equal­

ization of fingers is an object of technical study9 and de­

pressed knuckles are advocated. T.~e solution of the problem

of finger equalization is seen as np.::rseverance. 111° Kullak

believed in the idea that artificial motions had to be le&~ned

in order to play the piano properly. "Thus the natural con­

dition of the material [ringers! has entered upon the fi~st

step of artificial training."ll A further illustration of

the importance laid on finger technique can be seen in the

statement, " ..• the later development of all varieties of

touch and tone depends upon a finely individuated and highly

sensitive finger-action." 12 In £!.11E.t..k~ playing an after­

pressure on the keys, that is, an extra effort of the finger

muscles on the key after the tone has sounded, is recommended. 13

This is one of the curious misunderstandings of the nature of

the piano found in the older methods and to which Steinhausen

makes such scathing reference. Leschetizky also recommended

the same touch but primarily as an exercise in gaining finger

strength. In octave playing "Zig-zag motions with the inevi- ·

table jogging to and fro of the elbow are strictly forbidden. ,,l4

This directly contradicts most modern teaching, especially that

9 Ibiq_. , p. 114. 12rbid., p. 148.

10Ibid. ---' p. 116. 13Ibid., p. 152.

llrbid., p. 120. 14Ibid. --' p. 179.

Page 205: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

199

of t.Jhiteside. 15 Passive stretching of finger joints is

advocated.l6 See above, pp. 70 and 71, for Steinhausen's

view on this point. Kullak's opinion of the arm stroke is

summed up in the follo~:ving quotation: "The most skillful

arm-stroke, compared with that from the wrist or knuckles,

savors somewhat of roughness. 1117 The above summary of tech-

nical points is fairly representative of the literature on

piano technique before Steinhausen.

Leschetizky represents a curious phenomenon in the history

of piano pedagogy. His name is surely the most illustrious of

the great teachers. If the results of his teaching are in any

way reflected in the success of his pupils, then it was effec­

tive teaching indeed. A list of his pupils includes Paderewski,

Friedmann, Hambourg, Gabrilowitsch, Essipoff, Fanny Bloomfield,

Ethel Newcomb and Schnabel--an impressive roster. The question

is, how far does the playing of these students reflect the

technical approach of the master as his method is known to

us through the writings of his pupils? The book on which knowl­

edge of Leschetizky's approach is based is that of Malwine

Bree. 18 Also available in English is a book by Frl. Unschuld

von Melasfield.l9

15Abby Whiteside, The Pianist's ~echanis~ (New York, 1929) and Indispensables 9f Pian~ Playing (New York, 1955).

162£. cit., p. 183. 17Ibid., p. 189.

18M. Bree, The Leschetizky Method (New York, 1913).

l9unschuld, Th~ Pianist's Hand (New York, 1909).

Page 206: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

200

Both of th~se books agree on the general outlines of the

method. It might first be stated, however, what Leschetizky

himself thought about "methods" in general. He once said,

"~>Jrite over your music-room door the motto: 1 No Method! 11120

It is a curious fact, then, that the man who so abhorred

methods is the very one with whom the whole idea of method

is so closely associated.

When one thinks of the Leschetizky technical system a

vision of a rigidly enforced finger training is brought to

mind--a torturous, painful and exaggerated lifting of the

fingers, a low and rigid wrist position. This impression is

the lasting one given by the books mentioned above.

The position at the piano is relatively normal. The el­

bows are not allowed to droop lower than the keyboard, and

Leschetizky forbade his pupils to grovel in the keys on the

one hand or to adopt an imperious attitude at the keyboard

on the other. To illustrate the ideal position, he drew an

analogy to a rider seated easily on his horse and holding the

reins loosely in his grip.

The hand itself was held easily rounded with an attempt

to make each finger strike at the same place on the key (at

least on white keys). The staccato finger touch, on which

the writers mentioned above put such stress, demanded very

forcefully held-back fingers. It is upon this point that

20E. Newcomb, Leschetizkx ~ 1 l<new Him (New York, 1921), p. 5.

Page 207: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

201

Steinhausen and most contemporary teachers differ most

markedly from Leschetizky. The disciples of Leschetizky

tended to make this high-finger technique, complete with

"teacup" fifth finger, the sine ~non of picno playing.

This idea has been generally discredited today, s~c~~ the

whole strengthening and attention is focused on exactly the

wrong muscles--those pulling the fingers back, rather than

those drawing them down. Of the fact that the attack on the

key is the central question of piano technique there can be

no dispute. High-finger playing diverts the attention from

the most important part of the technique and is apt to divert

the student's attention from the musical result of the attack

as well.

Thumb passing was one of the most important features of

the Leschetizky system. In ascending figures, immediately

after the connection to the first finger was accomplished,

the thumb was to be snapped under the hand to prepare for its

next attack--the advantage being that the thumb was always

ready. The disadvantage was that the thumb's position hin­

dered the action of the other fingers. In the question of

thumb passing Leschetizky allowed no sidewise tilting of the

hand. (An exaggeration of this idea led later teachers to

place pennies on the back of the hand in order to insure its

being perfectly flat.) Lateral motion was, however, allowed,

and Leschetizky did advocate a free up-and-down motion of the

Page 208: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

202

wrist. The one restriction was apparently rigidly enforced,

that of allowing no rolling motion, a motion that originates

naturally in the fore- or upper-arm. This is in direct con­

trast to Steinhausen, of course, who advocated full freedom

of rotation in both the fore- and upper-arms.

One more point in the technical system, and one often

misinterpreted, is that of "after-pressure." This means that

after the key is struck the finger and forearm should continue,

and even more forcibly, to press downward into the key-bed.

This was intended to be an exercise exclusively, the object

being to build up the strength in the finger muscles by means

of this extra exertion. Tnere is certainly reason to believe

that this exercise might achieve the desired result. However,

it incurs the great disadvantage of fostering the habit, and

indeed of training the pupil in the habit, of key-bedding,

that is, in actual playing, of training the student to perform

an exhausting and useless extraneous motion which can, in re­

spect to the mechanical construction of the instrument, have

no possible effect on the already sounding tone. In addition,

any such after-pressure tends to divert attention from the

preparation of the following tone, which will most certainly

be under greater control when the playing mechanism is relaxed

and free of all unnecessary tension.

There is no doubt that the representation of the assistants

Bree and Unschuld gives a one-sided picture of Leschetizky's

Page 209: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

203

teaching. Leschetizky clearly considered no method satisfactory

for all pupils. He left the teaching of technique itself to

his assistants. It is known that he changed fingerings, dy-

namic markings and whole conceptions according to the peculi­

arities of the individual student. He took students to task

for trying to copy the interpretation or even the tec~,ical

approach of others in their own playing, even when he himself

had guided that approach. II .He at once took the greatest

interest in showing me how differently I must attack every

difficulty in the piece. Not only must the fingering be al­

tered, but even the tempos and shadings. Hy friend had under­

taken to write down all his suggestions of interpretation,

and these I had conscientiously transcribed to my own copy

and put them in practice as well as I could. 1121 His approach,

then, was suited to each student and concerned itself far more

with matters of interpretation, general musical culture and

.formation of musical style than with technique. A better pic­

ture of Leschetizky as the inspiring teacher can be obtained

from reading one of the biographies 22 than from reading the

methods wherein the impression of Leschetizky as a tireless

pedant is created. It is probably unfair to Leschetizky that

so much of the teaching done by purveyors of the Leschetizky

method has been done by those least equipped to present it.

21E. Newcomb, Leschetizky ~ I Knew Him (New York, 1921), p. 14. 22In addition ~o Ne~vcomb listed above, A. Hullah, Jheodor Leschetizky (New York. 1906~: a"'·~' t: ~·.~.~-"" 1 '""" 7 1"'"'r-'lore _ , , , .... u. .. •. .... v .... v'-•""a, ~·~.:_~

Leschetizkv, trans. Genevieve Seymot::: (~.s\·l York, l90J).

Page 210: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

\ 204

It is thus unfortunate that his name is linked with so much

inferior teaching. There is little doubt that Leschetizky

was a great and inspiring pedagogue who brought the very best

out of his pupils. There is a question, however, as to how

much this was due to any technical system. As this method

is stated by Bree and Unschuld, it runs completely contrary

to the teaching of Steinhausen, except for the general pos­

ture to be adopted at the piano. All of the objections of

Steinhausen cited above in connection with the older schools

would apply here as well.

The school of weight playing as a technical system prob­

ably began with the work of Ludwig Deppe (1828-1890). Host

of his theories have been thrown into disrepute by later

teachers and investigators, but the essential conception of

playing by use of the natural weight of the arm (however re­

strictive his application) was contained in the method.

It is clear that Deppe, living when he did, must have

been greatly influenced by the old school and yet not greatly

influenced by the investigation aroused by the great virtuosi,

especially Liszt and Anton Rubinstein, and by the scientific

spirit then coming of age. It is for this reason that the

explanations of his method seem to vacillate between a rigid,

inflexible system, resembling in many respects the older

methods, and a fundamentally new concept, weight playing,

which is never clearly or, better, practically presented.

Page 211: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

205

Two sources will be used for the following discussion.

These are the books written by Amy Fay23 and Elisabeth Caland.24

Both were pupils of Deppe. Miss Fay's book is not a method

but an autobiographical work relating the story of her work

under various German teachers. The outlines of Deppe's system

are given, however, and without the almost ludicrous combination

of poetry and pedantry indulged in by Miss Caland. Neither work

probably presents Deppe's teaching fairly, but Miss Fay's book,.

by giving something of Deppe the man, presents a more compre­

hensive picture of it.

It is clear that the focal point of Deppe's method was

the production of beautiful tone. Such an approach has one

great virtue. Whatever the scientific impossibilities of af­

fecting the piano tone may be, the approach focuses the stu­

dent's attention on listening. No one would venture to dis­

pute this aspect of any performer's practice discipline.

Deppe's motto was, apparently, "when it looks pretty,

then it is right. 1125 This means, according to Miss Caland,

the elimination "of all incoherent and doubled (or simultane­

ous) movements; for these, being inharmonious and disturbing

in their character, not only exert a destructive influence

23Mu~~~ Study in ~ermany. (New York, 1922).

24Artistic Piano Playing, trans. Evelyn Stevenson (Nashville, 19ory:---- :- -- -25caland, QQ. ~i~., p. 17.

Page 212: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

206

on the unity of a composition, but they also effectually ob­

scure the artistic thought with which it is interwoven." 26

This is an idea which Steinhausen presents as well. There

is a psychic connection between motion and artistic thought.

To locate and use the muscles necessary for the production

of sound is not enough. The musical result must be unified

with the motion used to achieve that result. The separation

of the mechanics of technique from musical expression is

wrong; they must be dependent on one another. Technique has

seldom, if ever, been approached scientifically from this

angle. Perhaps the subject is too vast and complex. Otto

Ortmann proposed such a study b~t never finished it, at least

in a published form. On the other hand, the above quotation

implies that there should be no motion opposed to or unneces­

sary to the artistic purpose. This is obvious, although often

overlooked, especially in the practice.

The main technical points of the Deppe method are: 1) the

light hand; 2) the position of the seat, hand and arm; and

3) the controlled free fall. The light hand means about the

same as Steinhausen's zero-weighting. The arm and hand are

carried by the shoulder muscles. Deppe goes one step further,

however. The back muscles are used to pull the shoulder blades

down, this action serving as a counterweight to the arm and

hand weight. This is physiological nonsense, as Steinhausen

Page 213: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

207

points out. (See above, p. 80.) It is in direct contrast

to Steinhausen's principle of passive weighting. Whereas

Deppe sees zero-weighting as the position to which one re­

turns, Steinhausen sees passive weighting as this function.

The fact is, however, that both positions are about equally

tiring, although the active lowering of the shoulder in

Deppe's position does add one extra element of fatigue.

The most unusual aspect of the Deppe method is the posi-

tion of the seat, hand and arm. The seat must be low enough

so that the elbow is below the level of the keys. (Bechstein

even made a pianc with longer legs to accommodate the Deppe

position.) Deppe attempts to throw the elbow out of action

by keeping it close to the body and with a "feeling like

lead." 27 It is to be kept almost immobile. The position of

the arm would be determined, of course, by this position of

elbow and shoulder. The hand position is quite unusual. It

is held lightly (as described above) \dth the elbow close to

the body and the wrist raised. The line of the outside of

the hand and the forearm should be straight, at right angles

to the keyboard. The outside of the hand should be slightly

raised. Miss Caland describes this as a "feat which experi­

ence will prove to be much easier in theory than in practice.n28

In this one can only concur. It is a feat which is, indeed,

27 Fay, Music Study

28Q2. cit., p. 26.

• • • , p. 293.

Page 214: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

208

not only difficult, but--except in stationary positions (of

which there are, unfortunately, but few examples in the piano

literature)--physically impossible. No matter which way one

twists or turns, the elbow resolutely moves out of its posi­

tion, thereby disturbing the pose. In addition, all of the

fingers strike the keys obliquely except the fifth, and the

thumb is barely able to gain a place on the keyboard.

The advantagesof this position, Miss Caland claims, are

these:

"(1) Owing to the straight line running through the hand and arm, the muscular connection between the two becomes of the most direct and positive kind. vfuen the hand is allowed to tu~ ou~ ~~ th~ wris~, this ·~~~~· is summarily broken at that point, and the fourth and fifth fingers--no longer lying parallel with the keys, but stretched diagonally across them-­suffer a proportionate loss of power.

"(2) The very important muscles which lie along the under (or inner) side of the foreann are nm.,;r brought into exactly that position which is most favorable to their free and unhampered co-operation with the muscles of the upper arm; hence follows a notable increase in their strength ~1d efficiency.

"(3) Through the agency of this hand-position the fingers are effectually aided in attaiDing to complete independence, and equality of power.u2Y

Taking the position of the hand at rest as carried uncon­

sciously at the side as normal, Deppe's position is best de­

scribed as a violent turning in of the inside of the hand.

One's description depends quite upon which side of the hand

is being looked at. It is disputable whether the "straight

29caland, QE· cit., pp. 27, 28.

Page 215: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

209

line" is a reality. Are the muscles really in a more "direct

line 11 in the Deppean position? Should not, rather, the mid­

dle of the hand be in a line with the middle of the back of

the forearm--a position infinitely more comfortable and free

of the trembling which Miss Caland freely confesses as occa­

sioned by Deppe's position?

The action of the fingers themselves is described as tran~

quil. Only the finger used is called upon to move, the others

remaining quietly on the surface of the keys. This is a de­

parture, and probably a good one, from the concentrated atten­

tion focused on the high finger action of the old school.

However, one is at a loss to see where the necessary force

is obtained for anything more than a Q!anissimo volume level.

Deppe expected that the student would be able to play scales

and arpeggios without extension of the thumb or turning of

the wrist, since the hand was already turned in to such an

extreme degree.. In practice, however, scales and arpeggios

are impossible to play in this position if the elbow is held

close to the side. In addition, the oblique position of the

fingers across the keys is patently absurd.

The controlled free fall is the most important point in

Deppe's system and the one which has led later writers to

consider him the first to introduce weight playing. What is

meant by this term, "controlled free fall," can only be in­

ferred from the system as recorded by Miss Caland. The low

Page 216: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

210

elbow rules out any use of the weight of the upper arm and

shoulder. Since Deppe discouraged high finger action but en­

couraged what he called the fall of the finger, it can only

be supposed that this fall really meant the fall of the fore­

arm. If it is not brought into play, it is difficult to see

where the necessary force would originate. (See above, p. 197.)

As Miss Caland says,

"Naturally it is not possible to produce a tone having much volume when the mind and will are entirely absorbed in the effort to make each movement of the fingers in exactly the right manner, and at the same time to govern the operation of the muscles from shoulder to fingertips. But, after the precise position of the hand has been acquired, and the working of the muscular mechanism has been mastered both physically and mentally, then the tone 'tvill ever grow in beauty and in sonority, and will be so spontaneous, so expressive, so instinct with life, that the player's wondering joy and s30isfaction will likewise increase as the days go by."

Could it be that the student gradually learned surreptitiously

to bring the forearm into play, balancing it so well that no

outward motion was visible? This could be an explanation for

what otherwise appears highly unlikely. The tendency of the

writer, Miss Caland, toward optimism as a substitute for ex­

planation is readily apparent in this passage.

In chord playing Deppe definitely recommended the use

of weight in connection with "muscular synergy," i.e., a co­

operation of all the muscles of the arm and back. An ener­

getic contraction of these muscles combined with the weight

Page 217: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

211

of the forearm and accompanied by instantaneous relaxation

comes very close to Steinhausen's idea of the throw.

The two revolutionary principles, then, in Deppe are the

use of the larger muscles of the back and the use of forearm

weight. Steinhausen sees the deficiencies in the method in

the exaggerated pronation of the hand, the emphasis on "car­

rying" the hand (Steinhausen's zero-weighting) and the elim­

ination of the shoulder and upper-arm as weight sources. Most

later writers have credited Deppe with the root idea of weight

playing, the foundation of the teaching of Breithaupt, Matthay,

Steinhausen, Levinskaya, Whiteside and others.

The most widely known name in the development of weight

playing is that of Rudolph Maria Breithaupt (1873-1945), whose

work, Die ~atuerliche Klaviertechnik began to appear in 1905.

Although there are many basic similarities between the teach­

ing of Breithaupt and that of Steinhausen, there are also some

fundamental differences. There is no doubt that Breithaupt's

work has had wider circulation than that of Steinhausen. This

is probably due to the fact that Breithaupt was an active piano

teacher at the Sternschen Konservatorium in Berlin and had a

great number of pupils, among whom was Artur Rubinstein.

Steinhausen's book was little known outside of Germany, although

it is mentioned at some length by Matthay, Schultz, Ortmann

and others.

The Breithaupt method is more practical in scope than

Page 218: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

212

the Steinhausen. The second part of the work, Die Schule des

GewichtsRiels, is a method in the true sense of the word.

Whereas Steinhausen argues against existing methods and gives

only a general suggestion for the basic form of attacking mo­

tion, Breithaupt makes specific suggestions and gives exer­

cises and concrete applications to the piano literature. This

is yet another reason why Breithaupt has had a much greater

influence than Steinhausen.

Breithaupt is mainly concerned with bringing the weight

of shoulder, upper-arm, forearm and hand into active partici­

pation during performance. Any suggestion of tension, fixation

or muscular action that would in any way inhibit the free use

of this weight is strongly opposed. Like Steinhausen, then,

Breithaupt objects greatly to independent finger action, fin­

ger exercises in the usual sense, or any fixation. This does

not mean, however, that he thinks that the strengthening of

fingers should be neglected. Such strengthening exercises

are performed in the following manner: the full weight of the

arm is allowed to rest on the fingertips (for the purpose of

the exercise, curved), and the wrist is then raised and low­

ered. There is no active finger motion. The efficacy of the

exercise is in the passive support given by the fingers to

the weight of the arm. In general, the use of fingers in

the Breithaupt method is restricted to transmitting and sup­

porting weight.

Page 219: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

213

Deppe's principle of "free fall" is further expanded by

Breithaupt. With Breithaupt it is a full arm drop. Breit­

haupt does not overlook the fact that there must be muscular

action to resist the upward driving force which appears upon

contact with the key. Johnstone's argument, then (see above,

p. 195), is not valid. Breithaupt differs from Steinhausen

in that the weight is not allowed to remain on the key-bed.

It is recovered at the shoulder and remains ready for the next

drop. Breithaupt proposes exercises for gaining control over

t~is action of weight recovery. The arm is allowed to rest

on c.ne finger. The key is then allow·ed to rise of its own

accord in an instantaneous act of recovering the weight at

the shouloer. Learning weight release and weight recovery

is an essentiQl feature of Breithaupt's system. In this habit

of slackening and relaxing all muscles immediately after the

descent lies, thinks Breithaup, the secret of effective and

purposeful technique.

Another way of using the weight of the arm is advocated

by Breithaupt. In this technique the arm is dangled at the

shoulder, the sustained note just barely being held, the wrist

low. With a sudden jerk forward of the lower arm and a simul­

taneous raising of the wrist the thrown weight is directed

onto the desired finger. The whole mechanism again relaxes

and assumes the first position, ready for the next attack.

As Breithaupt says, "the swinging motion of the arm is the

principal function of technic, the weight projected from the

Page 220: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

214

shoulder, the brachial mass itself is the source of all simple

energy.n 31

In addition to arm drop and the swinging motion, Breit­

haupt recommends forearm rotation and weight transfer. These

terms are used in the same sense that Steinhausen uses them.

(See above, p. 182.) The same criticisms would then apply.

Like Steinhausen, Breithaupt fails to recognize the possibility

of playing with fingers against a weight base. This deficiency

makes the discussion of weight incomplete. He does not, how­

ever, recommend passive weighting as the normal relaxed con­

dition. This is an improvement on Steinhausen.

An important and unique feature of Breithaupt's approach

is that he regards ~-legato as the basic touch. This is

a logical consequence of regarding the swing and drop as the

basic motions. As far as can be determined, Breithaupt is

alone in this view; all other authors state that legato is

the basis of all technique. This pronouncement of Breithaupt

is a courageous one and ought to be thoughtfully considered.

It is an inherent feature of all weight technique. This is

not to say that ~-legato is the necessary result of weight

technique. If legato be desired in the swing and drop, then

the student must learn to keep keys depressed with a minimum

of weight so that the arm weight is mainly supported at the

shoulder and elbow. It is then possible to swing or drop the

31 R. Breithaupt, Natural Piano-Technic, trans. John Bernhoff (Leipzig, 1909), II, 2T." . .

Page 221: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

215

weight onto the next key with legato connection. This is,

however, a refinement of the swing and drop and not an es­

sential part of them. Breithaupt is, therefore, correct in

his appraisal of ~-legato as the basis of weight technique.

He does little, however, to correct the impression that non­

legato is a necessary result of weight technique. It is ob­

viously true that legato is the musical goal most often re­

quired in melody playing. If weight playing were really op­

posed to such a legato, then it would have to be rejected for

such passages. That such an opposition does not really exist,

however, is evident in the light of the possible refinements

indicated above. Steinhausen recommends weight transfer for

legato playing. This is not really adequate, however, because

of the lack of dynamic control and the disadvantages of passive

weighting. Breithaupt suggests that the non-~egato inherent

in weight shifting (or swing) can be modified if accompanied

by inward or outward rotation of the upper-arm. Experiment

will show this to be true. It is a technique known as shoulder

guidance and is discussed more fully by Abby Whiteside.32

The remaining features of Breithaupt's system have to do

with the role of fingers. The hand position is derived in

the following manner. The arm is laid flat and outstretched

on a table top. The fingers are then drawn in, very slightly

curved, and the whole weight of the arm is transferred to the

32A. Whiteside, The Pianist's Mechanis~ (New York, 1929), pp. 40ff.

Page 222: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

216

fingertips. The point of resistance will be felt in the

knuckles which will stand up if the position is correct.

Breithaupt further recommends the use of the fingers as spokes

in a wheel, a conception similar to Steinhausen's. (See above,

p. 129.) Finger action is to be a sort of oscillation at the

knuckle joint with the fingers thrown forward and downward,

the action accompanied by a quick raising of the wrist.

As with Steinhausen, there is no real provision made in

Breithaupt's method for rapid passage work. The conception

of playing against a weight base is missing. Rotation in it­

self contains an inherent· lack of dynamic control, as indi­

cated above. The other actions recommended by Breithaupt

require a recovery before each weight release. Such a re­

covery of weight is time-consuming and rules out rapid play­

ing. Breithaupt differs from Steinhausen primarily in the

instantaneous recovery of weight after each attack. This is

directly opposed to Steinhausen's passive weighting and in

accordance with the theories of Matthay.

Tobias Matthay (1858-1945), the famous English pedagogue,

can be placed with Breithaupt and Steinhausen as one of the

so-called relaxation exponents. Matthay gives credit specif­

ically to Steinhausen, citing his "splended pioneer work.u33

Matthay stands opposed, however, to certain fundamental con-" ,.,<? '

cepts in Steinhausen's work. Matthay reject~ the idea of

33T. Matthay, Some Commentaries on the Teachi~ of Pi~oforte Technig~ (Lonaon; f9Trr,-p-:-r:- - -- - 1,-. -

Page 223: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

217

thro~4 and free fall 35 as well as passive weighting36 and

weight transfer.37 Matthay's objection to the throw and the

free fall is in the lack of control over key descent, a funda­

mental element in Matthay's system. Passive weighting is

rejected because of the effort required in supporting the

weight. Matthay was the first to recognize this deficiency

in the weight schools. Full weight transfer is not considered

desirable because of the supporting effort and because of the

lack of control over dynamics. 38 In spite of these consid­

erable differences Matthay commends Steinhausen for his work

in combatting the older German schools of finger technique.39

Before Matthay•s books are discussed further, it might be

well to mention the difficulties encountered in penetrating

Matthay's writing. Matthay was certainly no master of the

English language nor of literary style. All of his work reads

as if it had been translated from German. Matthay coins im­

possible words, even where very acceptable English equivalents

·are available. Some examples from ~ Visible and Invisible

in Pianofort~ Technigu_e are "un-knowledge," "promptable,"

34Ibid., pp. 46ff.

35T. Matthay, The Visible and Invisible in Pianoforte Tech-nique {London,-r932), p. 4o:- ------

36T. Matthay, The Act of Touch {New York, 1903), p. 184.

37Visible an~ Invisibl~ . . . ' p. 93.

38lbid., p. 30.

39some Commentaries ••• , pp. 47ff.

Page 224: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

218

"unrecent," and "prominentized." The organization of The

Act of Touch and of The Visible and Invisible in Pianoforte -- -- --- -- ----- --- --- -Technig~ is a marvel of confusion. The confusion results

from too much repetition and from carelessness in the organi­

zation. In addition to the main substance of each section

there are "preambles," "digests," "summaries," "notes,"

"codas," "recapitulations," "epitomes," "final precepts," and

"amplifications." Furthermore, much of the most pertinent

information is hidden in footnotes. It is small wonder, then,

that Matthay's work has not been widely read or well under­

stood. ~Vhile the haziness of his style effectually obscures

some of the deficiencies, it also obscures some of the essen­

tial truths. Matthay was, first and foremost, a musician and

not a writer. Fortunately, we have at least some of his ideas

in comprehensible form.

Matthay differed from Steinhausen (although not from

Breithaupt) in a very fundamental way. It is clear that

Matth~y believed that piano tone could be influenced by the

method of attack. 40 The requirements for beautiful tone were

1) elimination of percussive noises and 2) controlled key

descent. The latter meant, physically speaking, continued

contact between the key surface and the fingertip. This ruled

out, for Matthay, arm drop from above the keys as well as the

free swing from key to key as directed by Steinhausen. Matthay

4°For a full explanation of Matthay•s theory in regard to piano tone, see The ~~ of Touch, pp. 74ff.

Page 225: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

219

said, "Bad tone and lack of control over tone arises when the

key is jerked down by a too suddenly applied impulse. 1141 On

the other hand, Matthay recognized that the tone could not

be altered after it had been produced. This led him to his

theory of cessation of weight or muscular effort immediately

after tone production. For Matthay this did not mean the point

at which the key hits the key-bed. Furthermore, the sound

of the key hitting the bed was an undesirable percussive noise.

Matthay claimed that the complete elimination of contact with 42 the key-bed would be the result of a perfect technique.

In addition the key descent had to accelerate in the space

from the key surface to the point at which tone is produced.

This meant that the finger muscles had to be exerted in addi­

tion to other forces.

The difficulty in Matthay's fundamental theory of key

attack is that the three elements listed above (prepared at­

tack, avoidance of key-bed contact, and acceleration toward

the point of tone production) are not physically compatible.

The distance of key fall is too short for these actions to

take place. Matthay requires that the finger be in contact

with the key at the moment of attack, that the key descent

be accelerated, and that the key-bed be avoided--all this in

a space of less than three-eighths of an inch. The attempt

4lvisible and Invisible ••• , p. 93.

42Act o{ Touch.. • • , p. 92.

Page 226: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

220

to avoid hitting the key-bed seems to be the most impossible

feature. Any attempt at this would result in timidity, weak

tone, and fixation. It is probable that Matthay modified this

idea in his actual teaching. Certainly fixation is the very

antithesis of Matthay's system.43 Matthay is very sound,

however, in another aspect of this theory. The important

point for the pianist is that the key-bed is not the important

object in the attack, nor the key surface, but rather the mo­

ment of tone production. As an aid in developing this concept

11atthay suggests, "we shall not try to ~ the key_board--or

at it, but shall instead try to play the strings by means of

the key.n44 Simple experiment will show how effective psycho­

logically this suggestion is in preventing key-bedding.

Matthay was really the first to recognize the fact that

any action needs a base against which it can operate. Matthay

defines his touch "generatt in tenns of such bases. There is

much confusion here, and as Schultz points out,45 in two of

the suggested touches no tone could be produced at all.

43An amusing example of what can be done with this theory can be found in Schultz, The Riddle of the Pianist's Finger (Chicago, 1936), pp. 26lff. Schultz sees Matthay's theory of controlled key descent as correct. Matthay was incorrect, he thinks, in using weight as the basis of the attack. Since Schultz is in favor of fixation as the base against which the fingers act, he completely perverts Matthay's whole emphasis on relaxation to make Matthay's theory agree with his own.

44The Act of Touch, p. 49.

45The Riddle of the Pianist's Fing~, pp. 244ff.

Page 227: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

221

Matthay was caught between two principles he held to be always

valid: 1) that there should be no fixation; and 2) that there

should be no key-bedding. Matthay thought that continuous

weight release would mean key-bedding (Steinhausen's passive

weighting) to which he was opposed. The only other base pos­

sible was fixation to which he was just as opposed. Weight

release as a base for finger action offered no problem as long

as the tempo was slow enough. Then the weight release could

be recovered after each descent. At moderate to fast tempos,

however, this obviously becomes impossible, as Matthay actually

recognized.46 The only alternative to continuously released

weight is fixation. It is clear that Matthay probably did

in fact use released weight. He tried to get around the prob­

lem in his writings by using the tenn, "hand weight, 11 (this

would produce an extremely feeble tone in its pure form) or

by using such terms as "poised arm," etc. By poised arm,

Matthay probably meant partially released arm weight, i.e.,

an arm upon which some upward acting muscular force was still

present. A perfectly poised arm, however, will move upward

at the slightest downward pressure of a finger. It is, there­

fore, useless as a base. In summary then, Matthay recognized

the need for a base but failed to bring forth an adequate one.

His dread of key-bedding prevented him from allowing continu­

ously released weight in any form.

46The Act of Touch, p. 228.

Page 228: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

222

In discussing rotation, however, Matthay suggests a

possible base for finger action completely overlooked by

other writers. 47 Matthay's conception of rotation is much

more subtle and ingenious than that of all other authors.

The rotating action need not be visible. The muscles bring­

ing about rotation can serve as a resistance to finger action.

If the action is perfectly balanced, there is no outwardly

visible forearm rotation. The finger is exerted and the re­

sistance is supplied to prevent the hand from tipping in the·

opposite direction. This seems to be a perfectly reasonable

and plausible theory, although it is doubtful that such a

technique would operate completely without weight.

Matthay points out a deficiency in Steinhausen's sug­

gestions by stating that Steinhausen's not being a pianist

led him to think of everything as it appeared externally. 48

Steinhausen did not sense the balanced interplay of forces

which results in a perfectly calm exterior appearance, but

which does not necessarily mean muscular inactivity. This

has been pointed out above in regard to the use of weight

bases, and Matthay suggests the use of rotation as another

possibility. Still another such activity might be the play

of the muscles bringing the hand downward balanced against

finger action. If perfectly co-ordinated, such actions are

47~ Conunentar;_*!_~ ••• , p. 1. 48_Thid.' p. 47.

Page 229: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

223

not readily perceptible from without.

Matthay supports Steinhausen in another area--the impos­

sibility of willing muscular action directly. 49 Any action

at the piano is too complex in its co-ordination to be willed.

Furthermore no one is able to bring a particular muscle into

play; he wills a certain action, and the muscle relaxes or

contracts as is needed to bring the action about. This is

a very important point and of special significance for the

teacher Who is trying to direct the student's muscular ac•

tivity.

Matthay brings finger activity into much more prominence

than do either Steinhausen or Breithaupt. Almost every action

is at least accompanied by finger exertion. Matthay recog­

nizes that finger action is a necessity for rapid passages.50

This is a distinct advance over the pure weight schools.

Matthay is in agreement with Steinhausen, however, on the

theory of finger independence and agility. "The idea that

there are 'stiff' hands and fingers which have to be ground

down to suppleness by interminable exercises is mostly based

on fallacy.". '"Stiff' wrists, 'stiff' fingers, are, as a

rule, merely the outcome of incorrect muscular action--impeded

action~ i~e.: Action impeded by the unnecessary and harmful

associated action of the opposite muscles."51

49visi~le ?-_Il.<! Invisible ••• , pp. 15 and 157.

50Act ~ Touch: pp. 200 and 228. 5 ' libid., p. 21. See alsop. 180 for further discussion.

Page 230: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

224

In spite of all the above apparent contradictions Matthay

still belongs to the group advocating weight touch. All weight

touch must, in Matthay's v~ew, begin on the key surface and

be recovered immediately after tone production. Matthay also

speaks of levering the weight of the arm onto the key.52 To

do this the elbow rises as the weight is released. The "up­

action" prevents key-bedding. Matthay thinks that the "upper­

arm forward dig" produces especially ugly tone because of its

sudden and uncontrolled action. This is, incidentally, the

action advocated by Breithaupt as forearm extension. In con­

clusion: Matthay supports Steinhausen in the theory of finger

agility, basic weight touch, and the principle of rotation;

he is opposed, however, to passive weighting (key-bedding),

free arm drop,. swing and weight transfer. Matthay's method

has many internal contradictions which can be mitigated,

however, by common sense and practical experiment. Matthay

always has the advantage of his superior musical intuition

and often speaks meaningfully to fellow musicians who under­

stand the action he is attempting to describe. In any case,

Matthay's great fame as a teacher has to do primarily with

his interpretative insight, his greatness as a musical intel­

lect, and his love of beauty. This is well attested by the

work of his pupils, among whom are Myra Hess, Clifford Curzon

and Cecile Genhart.

52visible and _Invisible ••• , p. 35.

Page 231: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

225

Two further works on weight technique deserve brief men­

tion here--those of Levinskaya53 and Whiteside. 54 Levinskaya's

book is an attempt to synthesize the schools of weight tech­

nique and finger action. Both are considered about equally

important. The basic approach toward weight playing is that

of Steinhausen. Levinskaya's system differs from Matthay's

in that key-bedding is allowed. Levinskaya sees the greatest

weakness in Matthay as the dread of key-bedding which prevented

a really free use of weight.55 A rather superficial survey of

old and new methods is made, the methods discussed and compared

and finally synthesized.

Miss Abby Whiteside extends some of Matthay's principles.

She discourages all fixation, finger drill and reaching for

notes. In Miss Whiteside's view, the upper arm and shoulder

are the sources of all power and also the fulcrums for all

lateral motion. The principal faults in technique are the

use of separate power impulses for each tone, key-bedding,

over-use of small muscles and finding notes by reaching with

the fingers. 56 Miss Whiteside has some original ideas as well.

The greatest advantage of using large muscles is musical;

53M. Levinskaya, ~e Levinskaya ~~ of Pianoforte Tech-nique (London, 191"0)~ . .

54A. Whiteside, Indispensables of Piano-Playi~ (New York, 1955). The Pianist•slMecfianism-rNew York, 1~2~).

55~. cit., pp. 177ff.

56Pianist's Mechanism,· p. 8.

Page 232: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

226

.the notes then group themselves in the larger motion and are

not thought of as separate units. This is a point which all

advocates of pure finger technique should consider. It is

an unquestionable fact that all pianists who rely exclusively

on finger technique lack the larger conceptions of musical

phrase, momentum and line. This is probably the most signifi­

cant argument in favor of the employment of the larger muscles

as the source of power and position. As to the fingers, Miss

tfuiteside says, "The fingers in themselves have no power of

co-ordination. The boc!Y must be taught and the fingers will

find their way under the guidance of this central control.u57

She says further, "Most technical difficulties which persist

are the result of reaching with the fingers for key position.n58

Miss Whiteside makes no attempt to achieve ~egato in rapid

scales and arpeggios. She does not think that such legato

connection is possible or desirable and believes that the at­

tempt to achieve it results in tonal unevenness.59 The point

emphasized more strongly than any other is the initiation of

all movement by the upper-arm, usually serving as a guide and

fulcrum for a series of finger actions. The stress is on co­

ordinated activity, not on muscular isolation. "The muscle

power of the fingers is totally inadequate for producing a

57rndispensables ••• , p. 9.

58indispensables ••• , p. 76.

59Pianist's Mechanism, pp. 15 and 1~ and Indispensables p.l15. . . . '

Page 233: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

227

full range of dyz:tamics.u 60 Because of the attention given

to the fingers in scale practice Miss \Vhiteside says, "They

Lscale~7 should never, never be used as the basis for devel­

oping a technique.n6l

There remain two books for discussion which are the

result of a genuinely scientific attempt to base a technical

system on physiological truth. The books are those by Ort­

mann62 and Schultz.63 Neither book is easy or attractive

reading for the musician, not only because of the scientific·

terminology but also because of the non-musical manner of ap­

proach. Ortmann is the least offensive because he bases his

conclusions on observation of what is actually done by good

pianists at the keyboard. Schultz, on the other hand, has

almost no musical or psychological intuition, although he

has some very interesting things to say about muscular co­

ordination.

Otto Ortmann's work is a thoroughly organized and sci­

entific study of the mechanics of technique. It is not a

technical method but a study of muscular and joint action.

The contents will be briefly summarized in what follows.

Part I explains the physical organism and its construc­

tion, the skeleton and the joints. There are several

60Indispensables ••• , p. 118. 61~., p. 123.

62o. Ortmann The Phys_iological Mechani~ of Piano Technigl.!e, (New York, 192~~

63A. Schultz, ~Riddle 2f the Pianist's Finge~ (Chicago, 1936).

Page 234: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

228

interesting points here. The action of the elbow is in one

plane only; movements outside of this plane involve several

joints. This means that practically all forearm motion at

the keyboard is a co-operative motion. This agrees with

Steinhausen's findings. The vertical stroke of the fingers

is advised because it does not waste force. Ortmann does not

consider, however, the factor of control. The axis of rota­

tion is through the fourth finger, an important point in

teaching, but it may be shifted by adduction at the wrist.

The hand position giving greatest ease, according to joint

mechanics, is that usually recommended--fingers mildly curved

at each joint.64 (This position is chosen, however, to favor

finger action.) The last chief point in this section is of

significance. Adduction of the fingers is dependent upon

the degree of flexion.65 It is, therefore, necessary for

many hands to keep the third (knuckle) joint straight in order

to achieve the required flexion. A curved third joint is of­

ten a physically impossible position.

Chapter II has to do with muscles. The emphasis here

is on the inevitability of the interaction of muscles--a point

also noted by Steinhausen. Ortmann draws no conclusion from

this fact, however, except that complete isolation is impos­

sible. Steinhausen thought that this meant that there should

64ortmann, Physiological ••• , p. 32.

65~., p •. 38.

Page 235: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

229

be no attempt at isolation; Schultz, on the other hand, thinks

that isolation should be encouraged to the highest possible

degree, even if unattainable. The obvious impossibility of

complete relaxation is pointed out, 66 and the nature of the

psychic learning process is discussed along the lines of

Steinhausen.67 Teachers might also note what Ortmann has to

say about the effect.of circulatory deficiencies on technique.68

Moving the student's hand in the manner desired by the teacher

is not physiologically sound. Different muscles are used and

to different degrees in passive and active contractions. 69

As do Steinhausen and Matthay, Ortmann points out that good

co-ordination is the elimination of excess or antagonistic

motion. 70

Ortmann demonstrates that less muscular action is needed

to fix a joint at the moment of key contact if the bones are

in line ~dth the force (straightened finger, high wrist, etc.).

Most pianists feel, however, that some flexibility or give is

a necessity for control. Passages involving leaps with rapid

change of direction should be made with the smaller parts

(fingers, hand, forearm), since the larger parts are difficult

to control once their large mass is set in motion and allowed

to continue under the force of inertia. 71 This is contrary

l':f"

OOibid. p. 60. ---·- ' 69rbid. ----' p. 90.

67r bid. --·-' p. 64. 7 Or tid. ---, p. 100.

68rbid. --- ' p. 71. 7trbid. ---' p. 120.

Page 236: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

230

to Steinhausen, Matthay, Breithaupt and Whiteside, of course.

These writers all advocated no stretching or reaching by the

fingers. This was really on other grounds, however: adduction

of the fingers created hand-wrist tension and thus limited

finger agility. Ortmann discusses the inadvisability of call­

ing attention to the muscles themselves. Almost all of the

modern pedagogues are agreed on this. Ortmann shows that a

forward leaning position renders the upper-arm inactive. 72

This he thinks desirable because of the inertia problem men­

tioned above. Weight players·would think the opposite: full

weight is obtainable only in either an erect or slightly back­

ward leaning position. Ortmann is opposed to weight transfer

in its pure sense, as is Matthay, and for the same reasons.73

Ortmann recognizes the need for a fulcrum against which an

action can take place. He says, "The teaching of the proper

timing of the rigidity instead of its complete avoidance is

the problem of pedagogy.n 74 Steinhausen holds the same view.

(See above, pp. 73 and 74.) In practicing passages that de­

mand agility Ortmann advises, "If accuracy be the aim in

learning a passage that involves leaps and speed, the lightest

possible practice will be advisable.n75 "Arm-legato" is advo­

cated for passages slow enough to admit of it because of the

lack of percussiveness and shock and the gain in control.

72Ibid., p. 132. 74rbid., p. 158.

73Ibid., p. 138. 75ibid., p. 172.

Page 237: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

231

Ortmann discredits any attempt at quick release of keys, since

the key rises independently of finger action. This·is an im­

portant point, since much unnecessary tension arises from

·exaggeratedly quick key release. It is thus a mistake to

direct attention to the lift in teaching staccato.

Ortmann and Steinhausen disagree on the natural independ­

ence of fingers, but for different reasons. Steinhausen claims

that each finger is by nature independent since it has its own

tendon and nerve channel. Ortmann says, "The difficulty which

the young beginner finds in separate articulation of the fin­

gers results from the fact that, biologically, they are all

controlled by one muscle, the co-ordinated subdivision of which

has to be acquired through training.n76 Only a physiologist

would be in a position to confirm this statement. In any case,

Ortmann does not offer any assistance as to what sort of train­

ing would be effective in acquiring this articuL "ion. He dis­

credits high finger technique generally but is a strong advocate

of finger exercise. "The purely gymnastic training of the small

muscles of the fingers, ,hand, and fore-arm, in order to increase

their absolute strength, is, therefore, highly desirable for

piano technique.n77

These are, then, the main points of Ortmann's book. In

most points Ortmann and Steinhausen are in agreement. Ortmann,

761!?!.£., p. 217.

77tbid., p. 235.

Page 238: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

232

however, is even less inclined than Steinhausen to advocate

any specific technique. He simply warns against the more ob­

vious errors. There is no discussion of psychological or

musical matters or of the relationship of technique to music.

Ortmann is only concerned with the apparatus and its functions.

The book is, nonetheless, extremely valuable scientifically,

although useless as a method. To be of any real service to

a teacher it would have to be tempered with musical intuition.

Musical intuition is precisely the quality which Arnold

Schultz lacks. Although Schultz' work is extremely valuable

in many. ways, particularly in his careful analyses of various

touch forms, he overlooks or is unable to appreciate the con­

nection between technical motion and musical expression. Hi8

basic conclusions can only be considered unmusical; there is

no other word for them.

In the logic of his analysis Schultz is irreproachable.

He makes two statements at the outset, however, which are un­

supported: 1) that the controlled key-descent is the "first

general precept of piano technique~; and 2) that legato is

the basis of all technique.78 Steinhausen's concept is that

controlled key-descent is meaningless in tone production (see

Steinhausen's book, above, Section II), and Breithaupt argued

against legato as the basis for technique, although, of course,

admitting its musical value. Through long and lengthy reasoning

78!h! Riddle ••• , pp. 1, 2.

Page 239: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

233

Schultz arrives at the conclusion that the greatest control

and legato is achieved by arm and wrist fixation. \fuatever

may be the truth of his conclusion, any musician knows that

restriction of movement is fatal to musical expansiveness.

This is such an obvious and intuitive fact to a good musician

that Schultz• entire reasoning appears an abstract absurdity.

Schultz does have many valuable things to say, however.

Schultz points out, agreeing with Steinhausen, that "with

the exception of a type of finger-action, probably no movement

is required at the piano which the student has not had occa­

sion to use elsewh?re."79 Schultz seeks later, however, to

develop that finger action to the exclusion of almost all else

rather than subordinating it, as does Steinhausen. Schultz

points out that "strength has, as a matter of fact, very little

bearing on velocity."80 Schultz' view of relaxation is aston­

ishing. First, he misinterprets it, as is usual, to mean com­

plete relaxation. 81 He then says, nThe only general value of

relaxation) let it be repeated, rests in its promotion of en­

durance.u82 This is, of course, true. Schultz, however, views

this as relatively inconsequential. To a pianist this is one

of the funda~ental problems; the relaxation of all unused or

79The Riddle .•• , p. 9.

80rbid., p. 21.

Blrbid., PP· 23ff.

82Jbid.' p. 27.

Page 240: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

234

unnecessary muscles in order to achieve unhindered motion and

ease is the root of all good technique. Endurance is enor­

mously important, and the lack of it, in one way or another,

is at the bottom of most technical failures. By misjudging

the value of relaxation in a purely practical sense, Schultz

goes wide of the mark and betrays his essential ignorance of

what is involved in performance.

Schultz recognizes weight touch legato as being valuable

for slow passages, and he correctly points out that the proper

execution of the motion rests primarily on the correct use of

the wrist. He also admits of the use of other weight touches

but rules out the free arm drop because of its lack of con­

trol.83

The major effort of Schultz is devoted to finding out

which touch is the best for controlling key descent and which

provides the best legato at high velocities. This touch is

what he calls the "contra-fixation" movement84 or action of

the fingers against a fixed base. There seem to be two flaws

here, aside from the questionable value of controlled key des­

cent. First of all, legato is seldom a real consideration

in rapid, brilliant passage work. Non-legato playing is un­

deniably more brilliant. Furthermore, as Schultz admits, ..

"with extreme velocity there can be no problem of legato for

83~.' p. 174.

a4ibid., P· 62.

Page 241: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

235

the very rapidity with which the tones follow each other

serves to connect them."85 Secondly, Schultz thinks that

fingers which are isolated (as much as possible) from the

rest of the mechanism through joint fixation offer greater

control, since only a limited number of muscles need be used.

As Steinhausen points out many times, however, the finger mus­

cles are by nature unequal, and no amount of training can ever

make them even remotely the same. On the other hand, if weight

is used as a base, the force remains constant if rotated prop­

erly to balance finger action, as Matthay suggests. Desired

dynamic gradations can be obtained by greater finger effort

or by an increase in the amount of released weight. In contra­

fixation movement, little dynamic intensity can be achieved.

As Schultz says, "While its range of intensity with the small­

er playing units is less than that of the other two types, its

force is nevertheless adequate for the playing of most piano

music.n86 This is a questionable view. Teachers know that

the musical problem of most students is the inability to pro-

ject, to excite in the listener the response which corresponds

to their own emotional reaction to the printed page. The tech­

nical problem is the limited range of dynamics, the inadequate

magnification of the expressive power of widely differentiated

tonal intensities. Any touch, such as contra-fixation, which

85Ibid., p. 90.

86ibid., p. 81.

Page 242: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

236

limits this range must be rejected out of hand. To develop

the contra-fixation touch would be to paralyze the projective

capacities of the student. Schultz recommends the development

of a sensation of pressure in the finger as a guide to contra­

fixation touch. This is pernicious advice because the attempt

to manufacture such an artificial sensation leads inevitably

to the tensing of the extensor muscles in the fingers. The

pressure sensation is then artificially manufactured because

a resistance is set up in the finger itself. The reader who

knows Matthay may be confused here with the concept of pres­

sure which Matthay recommends. By emphasizing relaxation

instead of fixation, however, Matthay guards against ~he set­

ting up of antagonistic forces. Matthay is merely trying to

make the student sensitive to the actual, not artificial, key

resistance--quite a different matter.

Schultz gives a very interesting and valuable analysis

of finger co-ordination which must be read in its entirety

for comprehension.87 It is a scientific investigation which

can be of great value to the teacher in guarding against

technical faults. It is not of much help, however, in deter­

mining what those faults are. In addition, it should always

be borne in mind what Steinhausen and all physiologists say

about muscular action: it is not muscle contraction which is

willed, but rather the motion itself. The remainder of

87~., pp. l33ff.

Page 243: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

237

Schultz' book is concerned with a generally derogatory analysis

of the Leschetizky, Breithaupt and Matthay methods and a mild­

ly laudatory one of the Ortmann work. In summary it can be

seen that Schultz is imbued with the inclination and sometimes

the skill of a trained scientist. Much of what he says is,

therefore, valuable. On the whole, however, he is very far

from making any real contribution for he lacks, almost entirely,

musical understanding. There is no comprehension of the psy­

chological difficulty of expressing musical motion without

physical motion, especially for the less gifted. There is

insufficient appreciation of the practical importance of re­

laxation. Further, there are certain physiological errors,

especially those dealing with finger isolation, which have

been pointed out above. In short, Mr. Schultz' book is some­

times interesting and informative but, for a musician, aggra­

vatingly over-technical, fussy, and--although not for these

reasons--anti-musical.

In the course of this chapter the attempt has been made

to summarize the important points of methods appearing before

and after that of Steinhausen. Three methods, those of Stein­

hausen, Breithaupt and Matthay, appeared almost at -the same

time. It is difficult to say which had priority. The most

important part of Breithaupt's work appeared some years after

Steinhausen's, as did the later books of Matthay. In any case,

these three men obviously held varying ideas as to what con­

stituted weight technique. They are all agreed, however, on

Page 244: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

238

the meaning and importance of relaxation and on the musical

necessity of relating muscular action to artistic expression.

The differences have been pointed out above in some detail;

it should be remembered also that there were major areas of

agreement. The real distinction between them and the expo­

nents of the finger technique systems, old and new, lies in

these areas. Today the furor which Steinhausen's work, as

well as. that of Breithaupt and Matthay, aroused can hardly

be imagined. The great danger lay in the completely subor­

dinate position into which the fingers were placed. Schultz

gives an excellent summary of the action involved in finger

co-ordination, and such ideas are probably n~cessary antidotes

to the de-emphasis of such action in Steinhausen. There is

no reason to believe that finger action need be stiff, tense

and fatiguing. If, as Steinhausen suggests, it is used in

co-operation with weight technique, it can be quite the oppo­

site. One cannot, however, dispense with it. The significance

and value of Steinhausen's contribution should now be apparent.

His work was creative and highly important, although not "new. 11

Natural laws can never be new; they are simply discovered or

re-discovered. All later writers are highly indebted to Stein­

hausen, eithe~ directly or indirectly. All pianists owe him

great respect and gratitude, whatever his faults and deficien­

cies, for he was a pioneer in the sensible and free approach

to the keyboard which is now common heri.tage.

Page 245: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

BIBLIOGRAPHY

BOOKS

Bree, Malwine. The Leschetizky Method. New York: The Uni­versity Society:-f913.

Breithaupt, Rudolph. Natural Piano-~echnic, Vol. II. Trans. John Bernhoff. Leipzig: ~. F. Kahn~achfolger, 1909.

Brower, Harriette. Modern Hasters of the Keyboard. New York: Frederick A. Stokes Co., 1926.

Caland, Elisabeth. Artistic Piano Playing. Trans. Evelyn Stevenson. Nashville: The Ofyrnpian Press, 1903.

Ehrlich, Heinrich. Ho~-1 To Practice on the Piano. Trans. J. H. Cornell. ~w-york: G. ScKirmer,-lrfOZ.

Fay, Amy. Music Study in Germany. New York: Macmillan, 1922.

Hullahl Annette. Theodor Leschetizky. New York: John Lane Co., 1Y06.

Johnstone, J. Alfred. The Art of Teaching Pianoforte Playing. London: W. M. Reeves Ln.d~?:

Kullak, Dr. Adolph. Aesthetics of Pianoforte Playing. Trans. Dr. T. Baker. New York: G.-Schirmer, 1907.

Levinskaya, Maria. The Levinskaya S~stem of Pianoforte Tech­nique. London:~ M. Dent and ons, Ltd., 1930.

Hatthay, Tobias. The Act of Touch. London, New York: Longmans, Green and Company:-T903-.

------. Musical Interpret~tion, _Its Laws and Principles. Boston: Boston Music Co., 19~

-----. Some Commentarie~ QQ the Teachin~ of Pianoforte Tech­nique. London: Longmans, Green an co.;-Drtl.

239

Page 246: TIIS PHYSIOLOGICAL ERRORS AND THE RESHAPING OF PIANO ...

BIBLIOGRAPHY (Continued)

Matthay, Tobias. The Visible and Invisible in Pian~forte Te~hniqrg· London: H. Milford, OxbDra University Press, 32.

Newcomb, Ethel. Lescheti~ As I Knew Him. Ne-.-1 York: D. Appleton and Company, I91I.~ -------

Ortmann, Otto. The Physiological Mechanics of Piano Technique. New York: E:-P.--Dutton and Co., 19Z9~--

Riemann, Hugo. Catechism of Pianoforte Playing. New York: G. Schirmer, 190-.

Schultz, Arnold. The Riddle of the Pianist's Finger. Chicago: University of-chicago Press;-1936.

Unschuld, Marie von. The Pianist's Hand. New York: Carl Fischer, 1909.

Whiteside, Abby. Indispensables of Piano Playing. New York: Coleman Ross Co., Inc., D.r5s:-

------. The Pianist's Mechanism. New York: Schirmer, 1929.

OTHER REFERENCES

Apel, \-lilli. Harvard Dictionary of Music. Article, "Pianoforte Playing."

Grove's DictionaEY of Music and Musicians. 5th ed., Vol. VI. Article, •1Pian01orte Playing. 11

Lavignac~ Alfred. Enclclopedie de la ~qsig~ et pic~~~~aire du ~onservatoire. Articfe,-rrLe piano et sa tecl1n~que.'r-

Moser, H. J. Musils..le!£.ikon. Article, n Klavierpaedogogik." . "

Riemann, Hugo. Musiklexikon. 11th ed. Article, "Klavierspiel. 11

240


Recommended